LCD Projector
Model 8944
USER’S MANUAL
401-8944-00
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
P8r9oje4c4tor
User's Manual – Operating Guide
Thank you for purchasing this projector.
WARNING ►Before using this product, please read this manual to
ensure the proper use of this product. After reading, store in a safe place
for future reference.
About this manual
Various symbols are used in this manual. The meanings of these symbols are
described below.
WARNING This symbol indicates information that, if ignored, could possibly
result in personal injury or even death due to incorrect handling.
CAUTION This symbol indicates information that, if ignored, could possibly
result in personal injury or physical damage due to incorrect
handling.
Please refer to the pages written following this symbol.
NOTE • The information in this manual is subject to change without notice.
• The manufacturer assumes no responsibility for any errors that may appear in this manual.
• The reproduction, transfer or copy of all or any part of this document is not permitted
without express written consent.
Trademark acknowledgment
• Mac is registered trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc.
• VESA and SVGA are trademarks of the Video Electronics Standard Association.
• Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation.
•
is a trademark of SRS Labs, Inc.
• WOW technology is incorporated under license from SRS Labs, Inc.
All other trademarks are the properties of their respective owners.
ꢀ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Content
Content
About this manual 1 (EASY MENU continued . . . . . . . . . ꢁ6)
,
Content 2
Projector features 3
Keystone
, Keystone
Picture mode,
Brightness, Contrast, Color, Tint, Sharpness,
Whisper, Mirror, Reset, Filter time,
Language, Go to Advanced Menu...
PICTURE menu 27
Brightness, Contrast, Gamma, Color temp,
Color, Tint, Sharpness, Active iris, My memory
Preparations 3
Contents of package . . . . . . . . . . . . .3
Fastening the lens cover . . . . . . . . . .3
Part names 4
Projector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
Control panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
Rear panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
Setting up 7
Arrangement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
Adjusting the projector's elevator . . .9
Using the security bar and slot . . . . .9
IMAGE menu 30
Aspect, Over scan, V position, H position,
H
phase, H size, Auto adjust execute
INPUT menu 32
Progressive, Video nr, 3d-ycs,
Color space, Component, Video format,
Mꢀ-d, Frame lock, Rgb in, Resolution
Connecting your devices. . . . . . . . .ꢀ0 SETUP menu 36
Inserting an SD car and
Auto keystone
execute,
USB memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .ꢀꢁ Keystone
How to use the slot cover lock. . . . .ꢀ3 Mirror
Connecting power supply . . . . . . . .ꢀ3
,
Keystone , Whisper,
AUDIO menu 38
Remote control 14 Volume, Treble, Bass, Srs wow,
Laser pointer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .ꢀ4 Speaker, Audio
Putting batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .ꢀ4
SCREEN menu 39
About the remote control signal. . . .ꢀ5
Language, Menu position, Blank,
Changing the frequency of remote
Start up, MyScreen, MyScreen Lock,
control signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .ꢀ5
Message, Source name
Using as a wired remote control . . .ꢀ6
OPTION menu 43
Using as a
Auto search, Auto keystone
Auto on, Auto off, Lamp time,
,
simple PC mouse & keyboard . . .ꢀ6
Power on/off 17
Turning on the power. . . . . . . . . . . .ꢀ7
Turning off the power. . . . . . . . . . . .ꢀ7
Filter time, My button, Service,
Security
MIU menu 54
Live mode, Pc-less presentation, e-shot,
Setup, Information, Service
Maintenance 59
Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Air filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6ꢀ
Internal clock battery . . . . . . . . . . . .63
Other care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
Troubleshooting 65
Related messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
Regarding the indicator lamps. . . . .66
Phenomena that may be easy
Operating 18
Adjusting the volume. . . . . . . . . . . .ꢀ8
Temporarily muting the sound . . . . .ꢀ8
Selecting an input signal . . . . . . . . .ꢀ8
Searching an input signal . . . . . . . .ꢀ9
Selecting an aspect ratio. . . . . . . . .ꢀ9
Adjusting the zoom and focus . . . . .ꢁ0
Adjusting the lens shift . . . . . . . . . .ꢁ0
Using the automatic adjustment feature . .ꢁ0
Adjusting the position . . . . . . . . . . .ꢁꢀ
Correcting the keystone distortions.ꢁꢀ
Using the magnify feature . . . . . . . .ꢁꢁ
Freezing the screen. . . . . . . . . . . . .ꢁꢁ
Temporarily blanking the screen . . .ꢁ3
Using the menu function . . . . . . . . .ꢁ4
to be mistaken for machine defects . .68
Warranty and after-service 71
Specifications 71
EASY MENU 25
Technical Section . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-19
Network Function Section . . . . . . 1-83
Aspect, Auto keystone
execute,
ꢁ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Projector features / Preparations
Projector features
This projector is used to project various picture signals onto a screen. This
projector requires only a minimal amount of space for installation and can produce
a large projected image from even a short distance.
Preparations
Contents of package
Your projector should come with the items indicated on the description sheet.
Contact your dealer immediately if anything is missing.
NOTE • Keep the original packing materials for future reshipment. Be sure
to use the original packing materials when moving the projector. Use special
caution for the lens.
Fastening the lens cover
To avoid losing the lens cover, please fasten the lens cover to the projector using
the included strap.
Strap hole
Fix the strap to the strap hole of the lens
cover.
ꢀ.
Put one side of the strap into the groove on
the rivet.
ꢁ.
Bottom
Push the rivet into the rivet hole.
3.
Rivet hole
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Part names
Part names
Projector
(6)
(5)
(4)
HOT!
(ꢀ)
(3)
(7)
(ꢀ)
(ꢀꢀ)
(ꢀ) Speakers (x 4) ( 38).
(ꢁ) Focus ring ( 20)
(ꢁ0)
(3) Zoom ring ( 20)
(ꢁ)
(8)
(ꢀ5)
HOT!
(4) Lamp cover ( 59)
The lamp unit is inside.
(5) Lens shift cover ( 20)
(6) Horizontal lens shift dial ( 20)
(7) Vertical lens shift dial ( 20)
(8) Front cover
(ꢀꢁ)
(ꢀ4)
(ꢀꢀ)
(9)
(9) Lens ( 64)
(ꢀ0) Lens cover ( 3)
(ꢀ3)
(ꢀ0)
(ꢀꢁ)
(ꢀ9)
(ꢀꢀ) Remote sensors (x 3) ( 15)
(ꢀꢁ)
(ꢀ7)
(ꢀꢁ) Elevator feet (x ꢁ) ( 9)
(ꢀ6)
(ꢀ3) Elevator knobs (x ꢁ) ( 9)
(ꢀꢁ)
(ꢀ4) Filter cover ( 61)
The air filter and intake vent are
inside.
(ꢀ5) Exhaust vents
(ꢀ6) Intake vents
(ꢀ3)
(ꢀ7) Rivet hole ( 3)
(ꢀ8) Handle
(ꢀ9) Battery cover ( 63)
(ꢁ0)
(ꢁ0) Control panel ( 5)
(ꢀꢀ)
(ꢁꢀ) Rear panel ( 5)
(ꢀ)
(ꢁꢀ)
(ꢀ8)
(ꢀ)
WARNING ►HOT! : Do not touch around the lamp cover and the exhaust
vents during use or just after use, since it is too hot.
►Do not look into the lens or vents while the lamp is on, since the strong light
is not good for your eyes.
►Do not grab the front cover to hold the projector up, since the projector may
drop down.
►Do not handle the elevator knobs without holding the projector, since the
projector may drop down.
CAUTION ►Maintain normal ventilation to prevent the projector from
heating up. Do not cover, block or plug up the vents. Do not place anything that
can stick or be sucked to the vents, around the intake vents. Clean the air filter
periodically.
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Part names
(6)
(5)
(4)
Control panel
(ꢀ) STANDBY/ON button ( 17)
(ꢁ) MENU button ( 24)
It consists of four cursor buttons.
(3) INPUT button ( 18)
(4) POWER indicator ( 17)
(5) TEMP indicator ( 66)
(6) LAMP indicator ( 66)
(ꢀ)
(ꢁ)
(3)
Rear panel
(ꢀ) Shutdown switch ( 68)
(ꢁ) Security slot ( 9)
(3) Security bar ( 9)
(4) AC inlet ( 13)
(ꢁꢀ)
(ꢁꢁ)
(ꢀ)
(ꢁ)
(8)
(5) Power switch ( 17)
(ꢀ4) (ꢀ3) (ꢀ7) (6) (7) (ꢁ0) (ꢀ8)(9) (ꢀ9)
(6) RGBꢀ port ( 10)
(7) RGBꢁ port ( 10)
LAN
(8) CONTROL port ( 10)
SD CARD
AUX I/O
DC 5V 0.5A
(9) Mꢀ-D port ( 10)
RGB
OUT
RGB1
CB/PB
RGB2
M1-D
Y
AUDIO IN
AUDIO IN
1
2
VIDEO
(ꢀ0) VIDEO port ( 10)
CR/PR
REMOTE
CONTROL
(3.5Φ)
(ꢀꢀ) S-VIDEO port ( 10)
AUDIO
OUT
S-VIDEO
R
L
R
L
CONTROL
AUDIO IN
3
AUDIO IN
4
AC IN
(ꢀꢁ) COMPONENT
I
O
(Y, CB/PB, CR/PR) ports ( 10)
(ꢀ3) AUDIO INꢀ port ( 10)
(ꢀ4) AUDIO INꢁ port ( 10)
(ꢀ5) AUDIO IN3 (R/L) ports ( 10)
(ꢀ6) AUDIO IN4 (R/L) ports ( 10)
(ꢀ0) (ꢀꢀ) (ꢀ5) (ꢀ6)(ꢀꢁ)
(5) (4)
(3)
(ꢀ7) RGB OUT port ( 10)
(ꢀ8) AUDIO OUT port ( 10)
(ꢀ9) REMOTE CONTROL port ( 10)
(ꢁ0) LAN port ( 10)
(ꢁꢀ) SD card slot cover ( 12)
The SD card slot is inside.
(ꢁꢁ) AUX I/O port ( 12)
CAUTION ►Do not use the security bar and the security slot to prevent the
projector from falling down, since it is not designed for it.
►Use the shutdown switch only when the projector is not turned off by normal
procedure, since pushing this switch stops operation of the projector without
cooling it down.
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Part names
(ꢁ)
(ꢀ)
Remote control
(7)
(4)
LASER
INDICATOR
(8)
(3)
(ꢀ) Laser pointer ( 14)
STANDBY/ON
VIDEO
RGB
It is a beam outlet.
(ꢁ) LASER INDICATOR ( 14)
(3) LASER button ( 14)
(4) STANDBY/ON button ( 17)
(ꢀ7)
(ꢁ6)
(ꢀꢀ)
BLANK
LASER
(5) VOLUME button ( 18)
(6) MUTE button ( 18)
(7) VIDEO button ( 19)
(ꢁ7)
(ꢁꢀ)
(ꢁ3)
(ꢁ9)
(ꢁ4)
(ꢀ0)
(ꢀ8)
(5)
(8) RGB button ( 18)
ASPECT
(9) SEARCH button ( 19)
PUSH
ENTER
(ꢁꢁ)
(ꢁ8)
(ꢁ0)
(ꢁ5)
(ꢀꢁ)
(ꢀ4)
(ꢀ5)
(ꢀ6)
(ꢀ3)
(ꢀ0) AUTO button ( 20)
PAGE UP
ESC
PAGE DOWN
RESET
(ꢀꢀ) ASPECT button ( 19)
MENU
AUTO
(ꢀꢁ) POSITION button ( 21)
POSITION
(ꢀ3) KEYSTONE button ( 21)
(ꢀ4) MAGNIFY - ON button ( 22)
MAGNIFY
ON
MY BUTTON
1
VOLUME
MUTE
(ꢀ5) MAGNIFY - OFF button ( 22)
OFF
2
(6)
(9)
(ꢀ9)
(ꢀ6) FREEZE button ( 22)
FREEZE
KEYSTONE
SEARCH
(ꢀ7) BLANK button ( 23)
(ꢀ8) MY BUTTON - ꢀ button ( 45)
(ꢀ9) MY BUTTON - ꢁ button ( 45)
(30)
(ꢁ0) MENU button ( 24)
(ꢁꢀ) Lever switch ( 24) : acting 3 functions as below.
Cursor button ▲ : to slide toward the side marked ▲.
Cursor button ▼ : to slide toward the side marked ▼.
ENTER button : to push down the center point.
(22) Cursor button ◄ ( 24)
(23) Cursor button ► ( 24)
Back of
the remote control
(3ꢁ)
(ꢁ4) RESET button ( 24)
(ꢁ5) ESC button ( 24)
(ꢁ6) Mouse left button ( 16)
(ꢁ7) Mouse right button ( 16)
(ꢁ8) PAGE UP button ( 16)
(ꢁ9) PAGE DOWN button ( 16)
(30) Wired remote control port ( 16)
(3ꢀ) Battery cover ( 14)
(33)
(3ꢁ) Battery holder ( 14)
(33) Frequency switch ( 15)
WARNING ►Do not look into the beam outlet and
point the beam at people and pets while pressing the
LASER button, since the beam is not good for eyes.
CAUTION ►Note that the laser beam may result
in hazardous radiation exposure. Use the laser pointer
only for pointing on the screen.
(3ꢀ)
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting up
Setting up
Install the projector according to the environment and manner the projector will be
used in.
WARNING ►Place the projector in a stable horizontal position. If the
projector falls or is knocked over it could cause injury and/or damage to the
projector. Using a damaged projector could then result in fire and/or electric
shock.
• Do not place the projector on an unstable, slanted or vibrational surface such
as a wobbly or inclined stand.
• Do not place the projector on its side, front or rear position.
• Consult with your dealer before a special installation such as suspending from
a ceiling.
►Place the projector in a cool place, and ensure that there is sufficient
ventilation. The high temperature of the projector could cause fire, burns and/or
malfunction of the projector.
• Do not stop-up, block or otherwise cover the projector's vents.
• Keep a space of 30 cm or more between the sides of the projector and other
objects such as walls.
• Do not place the projector on metallic thing or anything weak in heat.
• Do not place the projector on carpet, cushions or bedding.
• Do not place the projector in direct sunlight or near hot objects such as
heaters.
• Do not place anything near the projector lens or vents, or on top of the
projector.
• Do not place anything that may be sucked into or stick to the vents on the
bottom of the projector. This projector has some intake vents also on the
bottom.
►Do not place the projector anyplace where it may get wet. Getting the
projector wet or inserting liquid into the projector could cause fire, electric shock
and/or malfunction of the projector.
• Do not place the projector in a bathroom or the outdoors.
• Do not place anything containing liquid near the projector.
CAUTION ►Avoid placing the projector in smoky, humid or dusty place.
Placing the projector in such places could cause fire, electric shock and/or
malfunction of the projector.
• Do not place the projector near humidifiers, smoking spaces or a kitchen.
►Position the projector to prevent light from directly hitting the projector's
remote sensor.
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting up
Arrangement
Refer to the illustrations and tables below to determine screen size and projection distance.
The values shown in the table are calculated for a full size screen: ꢀ0ꢁ4×768
(a) Screen size (diagonal)
(b) Projection distance (±ꢀ0%)
(c) Screen height (±ꢀ0%), when the vertical lens shift ( 20) is set full upward.
On a horizontal
surface
(b)
(a)
(c) up
(c) down
Suspended from
the ceiling
(c) up
(a)
(c) down
• Keep a space of 30 cm or more
between the sides of the projector
and other objects such as walls.
• Consult with your dealer before
a special installation such as
suspending from a ceiling.
(b)
4 : 3 screen
ꢀ6 : 9 screen
(a) Screen
size
(b) Projection distance
[m (inch)]
min. max.
(c) Screen height
(b) Projection distance
(c) Screen height
[cm (inch)]
[m (inch)]
min.
[cm (inch)]
[inch (m)]
down
up
max.
down
-ꢀ (0)
up
30 (0.8) 0.9 (35) ꢀ.ꢀ (4ꢁ)
40 (ꢀ.0) ꢀ.ꢁ (47) ꢀ.4 (57)
60 (ꢀ.5) ꢀ.8 (7ꢀ) ꢁ.ꢁ (86)
ꢀ.0 (38) ꢀ.ꢁ (46)
5
(ꢁ)
(ꢁ)
(4)
4ꢀ (ꢀ6)
39 (ꢀ5)
6
9
55 (ꢁꢁ) ꢀ.3 (5ꢀ) ꢀ.6 (6ꢁ) -ꢁ (-ꢀ) 5ꢀ (ꢁ0)
8ꢁ (3ꢁ) ꢁ.0 (78) ꢁ.4 (94) -ꢁ (-ꢀ) 77 (30)
96 (38) ꢁ.3 (9ꢀ) ꢁ.8 (ꢀꢀ0) -3 (-ꢀ) 90 (35)
70 (ꢀ.8) ꢁ.ꢀ (83) ꢁ.6 (ꢀ00) ꢀꢀ (4)
80 (ꢁ.0) ꢁ.4 (96) ꢁ.9 (ꢀꢀ5) ꢀꢁ (5) ꢀꢀ0 (43) ꢁ.6 (ꢀ04) 3.ꢁ (ꢀꢁ6) -3 (-ꢀ) ꢀ03 (4ꢀ)
90 (ꢁ.3) ꢁ.7 (ꢀ08) 3.3 (ꢀ30) ꢀ4 (5) ꢀꢁ3 (49) 3.0 (ꢀꢀ7) 3.6 (ꢀ4ꢀ) -4 (-ꢀ) ꢀꢀ6 (46)
ꢀ00 (ꢁ.5) 3.0 (ꢀꢁ0) 3.7 (ꢀ44) ꢀ5 (6) ꢀ37 (54) 3.3 (ꢀ3ꢀ) 4.0 (ꢀ57) -4 (-ꢁ) ꢀꢁ9 (5ꢀ)
ꢀꢁ0 (3.0) 3.7 (ꢀ44) 4.4 (ꢀ74) ꢀ8 (7) ꢀ65 (65) 4.0 (ꢀ57) 4.8 (ꢀ89) -5 (-ꢁ) ꢀ54 (6ꢀ)
ꢀ50 (3.8) 4.6 (ꢀ8ꢀ) 5.5 (ꢁꢀ7) ꢁ3 (9) ꢁ06 (8ꢀ) 5.0 (ꢀ97) 6.0 (ꢁ37) -6 (-ꢁ) ꢀ93 (76)
ꢁ00 (5.ꢀ) 6.ꢀ (ꢁ4ꢀ) 7.4 (ꢁ9ꢀ) 30 (ꢀꢁ) ꢁ74 (ꢀ08) 6.7 (ꢁ63) 8.0 (3ꢀ7) -8 (-3) ꢁ57 (ꢀ0ꢀ)
ꢁ50 (6.4) 7.7 (30ꢁ) 9.ꢁ (364) 38 (ꢀ5) 343 (ꢀ35) 8.4 (3ꢁ9) ꢀ0.ꢀ (396) -ꢀ0 (-4) 3ꢁꢁ (ꢀꢁ7)
300 (7.6) 9.ꢁ (363) ꢀꢀ.ꢀ (437) 46 (ꢀ8) 4ꢀꢀ (ꢀ6ꢁ) ꢀ0.0 (395) ꢀꢁ.ꢀ (476) -ꢀꢁ (-5) 386 (ꢀ5ꢁ)
350 (8.9) ꢀ0.8 (4ꢁ4) ꢀ3.0 (5ꢀ0) 53 (ꢁꢀ) 480 (ꢀ89) ꢀꢀ.7 (46ꢁ) ꢀ4.ꢀ (556) -ꢀ5 (-6) 450 (ꢀ77)
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting up
Adjusting the projector's elevator
When the place to put the projector is slightly uneven to the left or right, use the
elevator feet to place the projector horizontally.
Using the feet can also tilt the projector in order to project at
a suitable angle to the screen, elevating the front side of the
ꢀqꢁ
projector within 8 degrees.
This projector has ꢁ elevator feet and ꢁ elevator knobs. An elevator foot is
adjustable while pulling up the elevator knob on the same side as it.
ꢀ. Holding the projector, pull the elevator knobs up to loose the elevator feet.
ꢁ. Position the front side of the projector to the desired height.
3. Release the elevator knobs in order to lock the elevator feet.
4. After making sure that the elevator feet are locked, put the projector gently.
If necessary, the elevator feet can be manually twisted to make more precise
adjustments. Hold the projector when twisting the feet.
5.
To loose an elevator foot,
pull up the elevator knob
on the same side as it.
To finely adjust, twist
the foot.
CAUTION ►Do not handle the elevator knobs without holding the projector,
since the projector may drop down.
►Do not tilt the projector other than it elevating its front within 8 degrees using
the adjuster feet. A tilt of the projector exceeding the restriction could cause
malfunction or shortening the lifetime of consumables, or the projector itself.
Using the security bar and slot
Security bar
A commercial anti-theft chain or wire up to ꢀ0 mm in
diameter can be attached to the security bar on the
projector.
Also this product has the security slot for the Kensington
lock.
Anti-theft chain or wire
For details, see the manual of the security tool.
WARNING ►Do not use the security bar and the
security slot to prevent the projector from falling down,
since it is not designed for it.
Security slot
NOTE • The security bar and the security slot are not
comprehensive theft prevention measures. They are intended
to be used as supplemental theft prevention measure.
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting up
Connecting your devices
Be sure to read the manuals for devices before connecting them to the projector.
Make sure that all the devices are suitable to be connected with this product, and
prepare the cables required to connect.
Please refer to the following illustrations to connect them.
PC
LAN
AUDIO OUT
RGB OUT
AUDIO OUT
RS-232C
RGB OUT
M1-D
Mꢀ-D
signal
source
RGB IN
Monitor
LASER
INDICATOR
LAN
AUX I/O
Remote
control
DC 5V 0.5A
BLANK
LASER
ASPECT
PUSH ENTER
RGB
OUT
RGB1
RGB2
M1-D
Y
CB/PB
VIDEO
AUDIO IN
AUDIO IN
1
2
CR/PR
REMOTE
R
L
R
L
AUDIO
OUT
CONTROL
S-VIDEO
AUDIO IN
3
AUDIO IN
4
CONTROL
Speakers
AUDIO IN
Y
CB/PB
CR/PR
R
L
R
L
R
L
VIDEO OUT
AUDIO IN OUT
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
AUDIO IN OUT
S-VIDEO OUT
AUDIO IN OUT
VCR/DVD player
WARNING ►Do not disassemble or modify the projector.
►Be careful not to damage the cables, and do not use damaged cables.
CAUTION ►Turn off all devices and unplug their power cords prior to
connecting them to projector. Connecting a live device to the projector may
generate extremely loud noises or other abnormalities that may result in
malfunction or damage to the device and the projector.
►Use appropriate accessory or otherwise designed cables. Ask your dealer
about non-accessory cables which may have to be of a specific length or
equipped with a core. For cables with a core only at one end, connect the end
with the core to the projector.
►Make sure that devices are connected to the correct ports. An incorrect
connection may result in malfunction or damage to the device and the projector.
ꢀ0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting up
Connecting your devices (continued)
NOTE • Be sure to read the manuals for devices before connecting them to the
projector, and make sure that all the devices are suitable to be connected with this
product. Before connecting to a PC, check the signal level, the signal timing, and the
resolution.
- Do not connect LAN port to any network that might have the excessive voltage.
- Some signal may need an adapter to input this projector.
- Some PCs have multiple screen display modes that may include some signals which
are not supported by this projector.
- Although the projector can display signals with resolution up to UXGA (ꢀ600Xꢀꢁ00),
the signal will be converted to the projector’s panel resolution before being displayed.
The best display performance will be achieved if the resolutions of the input signal and
the projector panel are identical.
• While connecting, make sure that the shape of the cable's connector fits the port to
connect with. And be sure to tighten the screws on connectors with screws.
• When connecting a laptop PC to the projector, be sure to activate the PC’s external
RGB output. (Set the laptop PC to CRT display or to simultaneous LCD and CRT
display.) For details on how this is done, please refer to the instruction manual of the
corresponding laptop PC.
• When the picture resolution is changed on a computer depending on an input,
automatic adjustment function may take some time and may not be completed. In this
case, you may not be able to see a check box to select “Yes/No” for the new resolution
on Windows. Then the resolution will go back to the original. It might be recommended
to use other CRT or LCD monitors to change the resolution.
• In some cases, this projector may not display a proper picture or display any picture on
screen. For example, automatic adjustment may not function correctly with some input
signals. An input signal of composite sync or sync on G may confuse this projector, so
the projector may not display a proper picture.
• The Mꢀ-D port of this model is compatible with HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content
Protection) and therefore capable of displaying a video signal from HDCP compatible
DVD players or the like.
About Plug-and-Play capability
Plug-and-Play is a system composed of a computer, its operating system and peripheral
equipment (i.e. display devices). This projector is VESA DDC ꢁB compatible. Plug-and-
Play can be used by connecting this projector to a computer that is VESA DDC (display
data channel) compatible.
• Take advantage of this feature by connecting an RGB cable to the RGBꢀ port (DDC
ꢁB compatible). Plug-and-Play may not work properly if any other type of connection is
attempted.
• Please use the standard drivers in your computer as this projector is a Plug-and-Play
monitor.
ꢀꢀ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting up
Inserting an SD card and USB memory
When using the projector with a wireless LAN please insert the included wireless
network card. When using a commercial SD memory card in order to view images
insert the SD memory card in the same manner. And when using a commercial
USB memory in order to view images insert the USB memory to the AUX I/O port.
See this “User's Manual - Network Function Section” for information on using either
type of card.
Wireless
communication
AUX I/O port
LAN
RGB OUT
Wireless
communication
USB
memory
Insert the Wireless
network card
SD card slot
LAN
AUX I/O
DC 5V 0.5A
RGB
OUT
RGB1
RGB2
M1-D
Y
CB/PB
VIDEO
AUDIO IN
AUDIO IN
1
2
CR/PR
REMOTE
R
L
R
L
AUDIO
OUT
CONTROL
S-VIDEO
AUDIO IN
3
AUDIO IN
4
CONTROL
Angled corner
ꢀ. Make sure the projector’s power switch is OFF.
Remove the SD card slot cover. Pull the cover forward, pushing slightly its
edge up, to remove it from the projector.
ꢁ.
3.
Insert the SD card. Slowly insert the SD card completely into the SD card
slot. Make sure the angled corner of the SD card is facing the right side (AUX
I/O port side) of the projector while inserting.
Replace the SD card slot cover. Replace the cover by reversing the procedure
used when removing the cover.
4.
NOTE • When using the projector with a wired LAN, please remove the
wireless network card.
• Before removing the SD card or USB memory, be sure to perform the
(
58)
.
REMOVE procedure using the SERVICE menu under the MIU menu
IMPORTANT NOTE: To comply with FCC RF exposure compliance
requirements, the antenna used for this transmitter must be installed to provide
a separation distance of at least ꢁ0 cm from all persons and must not be co-
llocated or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.
ꢀꢁ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting up
How to use the slot cover lock
SD CARD
SD CARD
Open the slot cover lock, and insert it into the
locking a slot.
ꢀ.
Close the slot cover lock slowly, and attach a
padlock or combination lock to the slot cover
lock.
ꢁ.
Connecting power supply
ꢀ. Connect the connector of the power cord to the AC inlet of the projector.
ꢁ. Firmly plug the power cord's plug into the outlet.
AC inlet
Connector of the power cord
to the outlet
WARNING ►Please use extra caution when connecting the power cord, as
incorrect or faulty connections may result in fire and/or electrical shock.
• Only use the power cord that came with the projector. If it is damaged, contact
your dealer to newly get correct one.
• Only plug the power cord into an outlet rated for use with the power cord's
specified voltage range.The power outlet should be close to the projector and
easily accessible. Remove the power cord for complete separation.
• Never modify the power cord.
ꢀ3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote control
Remote control
Laser pointer
This remote control has a laser pointer in place of a finger or rod. The laser beam works
and the LASER INDICATOR lights while the LASER button is pressed.
LASER INDICATOR
LASER button
WARNING ►The laser pointer of the remote control is used in place of a
finger or rod. Never look directly into the laser beam outlet or point the laser
beam at other people. The laser beam can cause vision problems.
CAUTION ►Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures
other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
Putting batteries
Please load the batteries before using the remote control. If the remote control starts to
malfunction, replace the batteries. If you will not use the remote control for an extended
period, remove the batteries from the remote control and store them in a safe place.
Slide back and remove the
ꢀ.
battery cover in the direction
of the arrow.
Align and insert the two AA
ꢁ.
batteries according to their
plus and minus terminals as indicated in the remote control.
3. Replace the battery cover in the direction of the arrow and snap it back into place.
WARNING ►Always handle the batteries with care and use them only as
directed. Improper use may result in battery explosion, cracking or leakage,
which could result in fire, injury and/or pollution of the surrounding environment.
• Be sure to use only the batteries specified. Do not use batteries of different
types at the same time. Do not mix a new battery with used one.
•
Make sure the plus and minus terminals are correctly aligned when loading a battery.
• Keep a battery away from children and pets.
• Do not recharge, short circuit, solder or disassemble a battery.
•
•
Do not allow a battery in a fire or water. Keep batteries in a dark, cool and dry place.
If you observe a leakage of a battery, wipe out the flower and then replace a battery.
If the flower adheres your body or clothes, rinse well with water immediately.
• Obey the local laws on disposing the battery.
ꢀ4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote control
About the remote control signal
The remote control works with the projector’s remote sensors. This projector has three
remote sensors on the front, on the top, and on the back.
The sensors can be respectively turned active or inactive using the “REMOTE RECEIV”
in the SERVICE item of OPTION menu ( 47). Each sensor senses the signal within the
following range when the sensor is active.
The front and top sensors:
60 degrees (30 degrees to the left and right of the
sensor) within 3 meters about.
The back sensor:
40 degrees (ꢁ0 degrees to the left and right of the
sensor) within 3 meters about.
30º
30º
Approx.
3 m
NOTE • The remote control signal reflected
in the screen or the like may be available. If it is
difficult to send the signal to the sensor directly,
attempt to make the signal reflect.
30º
ꢁ0º
• The remote control uses infrared light to send
signals to the projector (Class ꢀ LED), so be sure
to use the remote control in an area free from
obstacles that could block the remote control’s
signal to the projector.
• The remote control may not work correctly if
strong light (such as direct sun light) or light from
an extremely close range (such as from an inverter
fluorescent lamp) shines on the remote sensor
of the projector. Adjust the position of projector
avoiding those lights.
30º
Approx.
3 m
ꢁ0º
Approx.
3 m
Changing the frequency of remote control signal
The accessory remote control has the choice of the
Back of the
mode ꢀ or the mode ꢁ, in the frequency of its signal.
remote control
If the remote control does not function properly,
attempt to change the signal frequency.
Please remember that the “REMOTE FREQ.” in
Inside of
the battery cover
SERVICE item of OPTION menu ( 47) of the
projector to be controlled should be set to the same
mode as the remote control.
To set the mode of the remote control, slide the
knob of the frequency switch inside the battery
cover into the position indicated by the mode
number to choose.
2
1
Frequency switch
ꢀ5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote control
Using as a wired remote control
The accessory remote control works as a wired remote
control, when the wired control port at the bottom of the
remote control connects with the REMOTE CONTROL
port on the back of the projector via an audio cable with 3.5
diameter stereo mini plugs.
REMOTE
CONTROL
(3.5Φ)
AUDIO
OUT
L
O
IN
4
When the remote control signal is hard to reach surely to
the projector in the environment, this function is effective.
NOTE • To connect the remote control with the projector, use an audio cable with
3.5 mm stereo mini plugs.
Using as a simple PC mouse & keyboard
The accessory remote control works as a simple mouse
and keyboard of the PC, when an Mꢀ-D/USB cable
connects this projector’s Mꢀ-D port with the PC’s DVI-D
and USB (A type) ports.
(1) Mouse left button
to a signal
source
Pushing the button into the center point works instead
of clicking the mouse's left button.
M1-D
Tilting this button to one of eight directions moves the
PC's move pointer on the screen in the direction.
(2) Mouse right button
Pressing the button works instead of clicking the
mouse’s right button.
LASER
INDICATOR
(3) Lever switch
STANDBY/ON
VIDEO
RGB
BLANK
LASER
Sliding toward the side marked ▲ works instead of the
[↑] key on the keyboard. Sliding toward the side marked
▼ works instead of the [↓] key on the keyboard.
(4) Cursor button ◄
This button works instead of the [←] key on the
keyboard.
(5) Cursor button ►
(1)
BLANK
LASER
(2)
ASPECT
PUSH ENTER
ASPECT
(3)
(4)
(6)
PAGE UP
ESC
PAGE DOWN
RESET
PUSH
ENTER
MENU
AUTO
(5)
(7)
POSITION
PAGE UP
ESC
PAGE DOWN
RESET
MAGNIFY
ON
MY BUTTON
1
VOLUME
MUTE
OFF
2
MENU
FREEZE
KEYSTONE
SEARCH
This button works instead of the [→] key on the keyboard.
(6) PAGE UP button
This button works instead of the PAGE UP key on the key board.
(7) PAGE DOWN button
This button works instead of the PAGE DOWN key on the key board.
NOTE • When the simple mouse & keyboard function of this product does not work
correctly, please check the following.
- When an Mꢀ-D/USB cable connects this projector with a PC having a built-in pointing
device (e.g. track ball) like a notebook PC, open BIOS setup menu, then select the
external mouse and disable the built-in pointing device, because the built-in pointing
device may have priority to this function.
- Windows 95 OSR ꢁ.ꢀ or higher is required for this function. And also this function may
not work depending on the PC’s configurations and mouse drivers.
-
Operating simultaneously two or more keys is void except for mouse drag and drop operation.
- This function is activated only when the projector is working properly.
ꢀ6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Power on/off
Power on/off
STANDBY/ON button
POWER indicator
Turning on the power
Make sure that the power cord is firmly and correctly
ꢀ. connected to the projector and the outlet.
Remove the lens cover, and set the power switch to the
ꢁ. ON position (marked “ I “).
The power indicator will light up in steady orange ( 66).
Then wait several seconds because the buttons may not
function for these several seconds.
Press the STANDBY/ON button on the projector or the
Power
switch
3. remote control.
The projection lamp will light up and the POWER indicator
will begin blinking in green. When the power is completely
on, the indicator will stop blinking and light in steady green.
To display the picture, select an input signal according to the section "Selecting an input
signal" ( 19).
Turning off the power
Press the STANDBY/ON button on the projector or the remote control.
ꢀ. The message "Power off?" will appear on the screen for about 5 seconds.
Press the STANDBY/ON button on the projector or the remote control again while the message
ꢁ. appears.
The projector lamp will go off, and the POWER indicator will begin blinking in orange.
Then the POWER indicator will stop blinking and light in steady orange when the lamp
cooling is complete.
Make sure that the power indicator lights in steady orange, and set the power switch to the
3. OFF position (marked “O“).
The POWER indicator will go off. Attach the lens cover.
Do not turn the projector on for ꢀ0 minutes or more after turning it off. Turning the projector on again
too soon could shorten the lifetime of some consumable parts of the projector.
WARNING ►A strong light is emitted when the projector’s power is on. Do not look into
the lens of the projector or look inside of the projector through any of the projector’s openings.
►Do not touch around the lamp cover and the exhaust vents during use or just after use, since it is too hot.
NOTE • Turn the power on/off in right order. Please power on the projector prior
to the connected devices. Power off the projector later than the connected devices.
•
Before turning the projector off, be sure to perform the REMOVE procedure using the
(
58)
SERVICE menu under the MIU menu if the SD card or USB memory is used
.
• When the AUTO ON of the OPTION menu is set to the TURN ON, and the power
was turned off by the power switch last time, only turning the power switch on makes
(
43)
.
the projection lamp light and makes the POWER indicator begin blinking
(
66)
only when the projector is not turned off by
• Use the shutdown switch
normal procedure.
ꢀ7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating
Operating
PUSH
ENTER
Adjusting the volume
PAGE UP
ESC
PAGE DOWN
RESET
Press the VOLUME button on the remote control.
ꢀ.
MENU
AUTO
A dialog will appear on the screen to aid you in adjusting the volume.
POSITION
ꢁ. Use the cursor buttons ▲/▼ to adjust the volume.
MAGNIFY
ON
MY BUTTON
1
VOLUME
MU
To close the dialog and complete the operation, press the
VOLUME button again. Even if you do not do anything, the
dialog will automatically disappear after a few seconds.
● When no audio port is selected for current picture input port, the volume
(
38)
adjustment is disable. Please see the AUDIO item of AUDIO menu.
Temporarily muting the sound
POSITION
AUTO
Press the MUTE button on the remote control.
MAGNIFY
ON
MY BUTTON
1
VOLUME
MUTE
ꢀ.
A dialog will appear on the screen indicating that you have muted the sound.
OFF
2
To restore the sound, press the MUTE or VOLUME button.
Even if you do not do anything, the dialog will automatically
disappear after a few seconds.
FREEZE
KEYSTONE
SEA
● As long as no audio input is selected for current picture input port, the sound is
(
38)
always muted. Please see the AUDIO item of AUDIO menu.
Selecting an input signal
Press the INPUT button on the projector.
Each time you press the button, the projector switches its
input port as below.
ꢀ.
RGB ꢀ
VIDEO
RGB ꢁ
Mꢀ-D
MIU
B
B
R
R
S-VIDEO
COMPONENT (Y, C /R , C /B )
Press the RGB button on the remote control to select an
input port for the RGB signal.
Each time you press the button, the projector switches its RGB
input port as below.
ꢀ.
LASER
INDICATOR
STANDBY/ON
VIDEO
RGB
RGB ꢀ RGB ꢁ Mꢀ-D MIU
● If the RGB button is pushed (when switching from VIDEO to RGB signals)
when TURN ON is selected for the AUTO SEARCH item in the OPTION menu
the projector will check the RGB 1 port first. If no input is detected at the port,
the projector will check other port in above order.
(continued on next page)
ꢀ8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating
Selecting an input signal (continued)
LASER
INDICATOR
Press the VIDEO button on the remote control to select an
input for video signal.
Each time you press the button, the projector switches its
video input port as below.
STANDBY/ON
VIDEO
RGB
ꢀ.
B
B
R
R
COMPONENT (Y, C /R , C /B )
S-VIDEO
VIDEO
● If the VIDEO button is pushed (when switching from RGB to VIDEO signals)
when TURN ON is selected for the AUTO SEARCH item in the OPTION menu
B
B
R
R
the projector will check the COMPONENT (Y, C /R , C /B ) port first. If no input
is detected at the port, the projector will check other ports in above order.
MAGNIFY
ON
MY BUTTON
1
VOLUME
MUTE
Searching an input signal
OFF
2
ꢀ. Press the SEARCH button on the remote control.
FREEZE
KEYSTONE
SEARCH
The projector will start to check its input ports in order to
find any input signals.
When an input is found, the projector will stop searching and display the image.
If no signal is found, the projector will return to the state selected before the
operation.
B
B
R
R
RGB ꢀ
RGB ꢁ
Mꢀ-D
MIU
COMPONENT (Y, C /R , C /B )
S-VIDEO
VIDEO
● The MIU input is skipped, as long as no image is sent from PC on the “Live
(
54)
.
Mode” of MIU
Selecting an aspect ratio
Press the ASPECT button on the remote control.
Each time you press the button, the projector switches the mode for aspect
ratio in turn.
ꢀ.
For an RGB or MIU signal
NORMAL 4:3 SMALL
ꢀ6:9
For an M1-D signal
NORMAL 4:3 ꢀ6:9
ASPCT
ꢀ4:9
SMALL
For a video signal, s-video signal or component video signal
4:3 ꢀ6:9 ꢀ4:9 SMALL
For no signal
4:3 (fixed)
● The NORMAL mode keeps the original aspect ratio of the signal.
● Performing the automatic adjustment initializes the aspect ratio setting.
ꢀ9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating
Focus ring
Adjusting the zoom and focus
ꢀ. Use the zoom ring to adjust the screen size.
ꢁ. Use the focus ring to focus the picture.
Zoom ring
Top
Adjusting the lens shift
2/5
UP
Use the vertical lens shift dial to shift
ꢀ.
Lens shift cover
the picture upward or downward.
DOWN
Use the horizontal lens shift dial to
shift the picture left or right.
1/10
ꢁ.
RIGHT
LEFT
1/10
NOTE • When the vertical lens
shift is adjusted, it is recommended to
shift the picture upward.
Using the automatic adjustment feature
PUSH
ENTER
ꢀ. Press the AUTO button on the remote control.
PAGE UP
ESC
PAGE DOWN
MENU
AUTO
RESET
For an RGB or MIU signal
POSITION
MAGNIFY
The vertical position, the horizontal position, the horizontal
phase and the horizontal size will be automatically adjusted.
MY B
VOLUME
And the aspect ratio will be automatically set to default. Make sure that the
application window is set to its maximum size prior to attempting to use this
feature. A dark picture may still be incorrectly adjusted. Use a bright picture
when adjusting.
For an M1-D signal
The aspect ratio will be automatically set to default.
For a video signal or s-video signal
The video format best suited for the respective input signal will be selected
automatically.
This function is available only when the AUTO is selected to the VIDEO
(
33)
FORMAT item in INPUT menu
. For a component video signal, the
signal type is identified automatically independently of this function.
For a video signal, s-video signal or component video signal
The vertical position, horizontal position and aspect ratio will be automatically
set to default.
For a component video signal
The horizontal phase will be automatically set to default.
● The automatic adjustment operation requires about 10 seconds. Also please
note that it may not function correctly with some input.
ꢁ0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating
PUSH
ENTER
Adjusting the position
PAGE UP
ESC
PAGE DOWN
RESET
Press the POSITION button on the remote control.
ꢀ.
The “POSITION” indication will appear on the screen.
MENU
AUTO
POSITION
MAY
Use the cursor buttons ▲/▼/◄/► to adjust the picture
position.
ꢁ.
MY BUTTON
VOLUME
When you want to reset the operation, press the RESET button on the remote
control during the operation.
To complete this operation, press the POSITION button again. Even if you do
not do anything, the dialog will automatically disappear after a few seconds.
●
●
When this function is performed on a video signal, s-video signal or component video
signal, some image such as an extra-line may appear at outside of the picture.
When this function is performed on a video signal, s-video signal, or component video signal
of 5ꢁ5i (480i) or 6ꢁ5i (576i), the range of this adjustment depends on the OVER SCAN in
(
30)
setting. It is not possible to adjust when the OVER SCAN is set to ꢀ0.
IMAGE menu
Correcting the keystone distortions
Press the KEYSTONE button on the
MAGNIFY
ON
MY BUTTON
1
VOLUME
MUTE
ꢀ.
ꢀ-';5610'ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ#761ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ':'%76'ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ/#07#.ꢀ
remote control. A dialog will appear on the
screen to aid you in correcting the distortion.
OFF
2
ꢁꢂ
ꢁꢂ
FREEZE
KEYSTONE
SEARCH
Use the cursor buttons
MANUAL operation, and press the button to perform the following.
▲
/
▼
to select AUTO or
ꢁ.
►
ꢀ) AUTO executes automatic vertical keystone correction.
ꢁ) Manual displays a dialog for keystone correction.
Use the cursor buttons ◄/► to select the direction to correct
(
or ) then use the buttons ▲/▼ for adjustment.
To close the dialog and complete this operation, press the
KEYSTONE button again. Even if you don’t do anything,
the dialog will automatically disappear after a few seconds.
ꢀꢁ ꢀꢁ
-';5610'ꢂ
● The adjustable range of this function will vary among inputs. For some input,
this function may not work well.
● When V:INVERT or H&V:INVERT is selected to the MIRROR item in the
SETUP menu, if the projector screen is inclined or angled downward, this
function may not work correctly.
● When the zoom adjustment is set to the TELE (telephoto focus), this function
may be excessive. This function should be used when the zoom adjustment is
set to the full WIDE (wide-angle focus) whenever possible.
●
When the projector is placed on the level (about ±3°), this function may not work.
● When the projector is inclined to near ±30 degree or over, this function may not
work well.
●
When the vertical lens shift is not set fully upward (not set fully downward for the
46)
(
optional lens type FL-60ꢀ only
), this function may not work well.
●
When the horizontal lens shift is not set to the center, this function may not work well.
(
52).
● This function will be unavailable when Transition Detector is on
ꢁꢀ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating
Using the magnify feature
ESC
MENU
AUTO
RESET
Press the ON button of MAGNIFY on the remote control.
ꢀ.
The “MAGNIFY” indication will appear on the screen
POSITION
(although the indication will disappear in several seconds with
no operation), and the projector will go into the MAGNIFY
mode.
MAGNIFY
O
MY BUTTON
1
VOLUME
MUTE
ꢁ. Use the cursor buttons ▲/▼ to adjust the zoom level.
To move the zoom area, press the POSITION button in the MAGNIFY mode,
then use the cursor buttons ▲/▼/◄/► to move the area. And to finalize the
zoom area, press the POSITION button again.
To exit from the MAGNIFY mode and restore the screen to normal, press the
OFF button of MAGNIFY on the remote control.
● The projector automatically exits from the MAGNIFY mode when the input
signal is changed, or when the display condition is changed.
● Although in the MAGNIFY mode, the keystone distortion condition may vary, it
will be restored when the projector exits from the MAGNIFY mode.
NOTE • The zoom level can be finely adjusted. Closely watch the screen to
find the level you want.
Freezing the screen
Press the FREEZE button on the remote control.
The “FREEZE” indication will appear on the screen (although
the indication will not appear when the TURN ON is selected
MAGNIFY
ON
MY BUTTON
1
VOLUME
MUTE
ꢀ.
OFF
2
FREEZE
KEYSTONE
SEARCH
(
42)
to the MESSAGE item of SCREEN menu
projector will go into the FREEZE mode.
), and the
To exit the FREEZE mode and restore the screen to normal, press the FREEZE
button again.
● The projector automatically exits from the FREEZE mode when the input signal
changes, or when one of the projector’s buttons or the remote control buttons
of STANDBY/ON, SEARCH, RGB, VIDEO, BLANK, AUTO, ASPECT, VOLUME,
MUTE, KEYSTONE, POSITION, MENU, MAGNIFY and MY BUTTON is
pressed.
● If the projector continues projecting a still image for a long time, the LCD panel
might possibly be burned in. Do not leave the projector in the FREEZE mode
for too long.
ꢁꢁ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating
Temporarily blanking the screen
Press the BLANK button on the remote control.
ꢀ.
The blank screen will be displayed instead of the screen
of input signal. Please refer to the BLANK item in SCREEN
BLANK
LASER
(
39).
menu
To exit from the blank screen and return to the input signal screen, press the
BLANK button again.
● The projector automatically returns to the input signal screen when one of
the projector’s buttons or the remote control buttons is pressed or one of the
commands (except get commands) is transmitted to the control port.
NOTE • The sound is not connected with the blank screen function. If
necessary, set the volume or mute first.
ꢁ3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating
Using the menu function
This projector has the following menus: PICTURE, IMAGE, INPUT, SETUP, AUDIO,
SCREEN, OPTION, MIU, and EASY MENU. EASY MENU consists of functions often used,
and the other menus are classified into each purpose. Each of these menus is operated
using the same methods. The basic operations of these menus are as follows.
ENTER button
ASPECT
PUSH
ENTER
PAGE UP
ESC
PAGE DOWN
RESET
Cursor buttons
MENU button
RESET button
MENU
AUTO
POSITION
ꢀ/'07ꢀ=4)$ꢁ?
ꢀ2+%674'ꢀ
ꢀꢀꢀꢄ5'.'%6ꢀ
Press the MENU button on the remote control or one of
the cursor buttons on the projector.
The Advanced MENU, or EASY MENU that has priority just
after powered on, will appear.
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ.
ꢀ$4+)*60'55ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ㧗ꢃ
ꢀ%1064#56ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ㧗ꢃ
ꢀ)#//#ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ&'(#7.6ꢀꢁꢀ
ꢀ
%1.14ꢀ6'/2ꢀꢀꢀ/+&
%1.14ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ㧗ꢃ
ꢀ
ꢀ+0276ꢀ
+/#)'ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
5'672ꢀ
ꢀ#7&+1
ꢀ5%4''0
ꢀ126+10
ꢀ/+7
ꢀ6+06ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ㧗ꢃ
ꢀ5*#420'55ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢂꢀ
ꢀ#%6+8'ꢀ+4+5ꢀꢀꢀ6740ꢀ1((
ꢀ'#5;ꢀ/'07 ꢀ/;ꢀ/'/14;ꢀꢀꢀꢀ5#8'ꢀꢁ
In the EASY MENU
If you want to change it to the Advanced MENU, select the
"Go to Advanced Menu..."
ꢁ.
ꢀ'#5;ꢀ/'07ꢀ=4)$ꢁ?
ꢀ#52'%6ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢂꢃꢄꢀ
ꢀ
3. Use the cursor buttons ▲/▼ to select an item to operate.
':'%76'
#761ꢀ-';5610'
ꢀ
ꢅꢆ
ꢅꢆ
-';5610'
-';5610'
2+%674'ꢀ/1&'
$4+)*60'55
%1064#56
%1.14
4. Use the cursor buttons◄/► to operate the item.
014/#.
ꢅꢆ
ꢅꢆ
ꢅꢆ
ꢅꢆ
ꢀꢄ
In the Advanced MENU
6+06
Use the cursor buttons ▲/▼ to select a menu.
ꢁ.
5*#420'55
9*+52'4
/+4414
4'5'6
(+.6'4ꢀ6+/'
.#0)7#)'
014/#.
014/#.
If you want to change it to the EASY MENU, select the
EASY MENU.
ꢀꢀꢀꢆJ
'0).+5*
ꢀ)QꢀVQꢀ#FXCPEGFꢀ/GPWꢇꢇꢇ
Then press the cursor button ► on the projector or remote
control, or the ENTER button on the remote control to select
an item. The display of the selected menu will be active.
Use the cursor buttons ▲/▼ to select an item to operate.
3.
Then press the cursor button
►
on the projector or remote control, or the ENTER button
on the remote control to progress. The operation menu of the selected item will appear.
4. Use the cursor buttons▲/▼ to operate the item.
●
●
When you want to reset the operation, press the RESET button on the remote control
during the operation. Note that items whose functions are performed simultaneously
with operation (ex. LANGUAGE, H PHASE, VOLUME etc.) cannot be reset.
In the Advanced MENU, when you want to return to the previous display, press the
cursor button
control.
◄
on the projector or remote control, or the ESC button on the remote
Press the MENU button on the remote control again to close the menu
and complete this operation. Even if you do not do anything, the dialog will
5.
automatically disappear after about ꢀ0 seconds.
● Some functions cannot be performed when a certain input port is selected, or
when a certain input signal is displayed.
ꢁ4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EASY Menu
ꢀ'#5;ꢀ/'07ꢀ=4)$ꢁ?
ꢀ#52'%6ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢂꢃꢄꢀ
EASY Menu
ꢀ
':'%76'
#761ꢀ-';5610'
ꢀ
ꢅꢆ
ꢅꢆ
-';5610'
From the EASY MENU, items shown in the table below can
be performed.
-';5610'
2+%674'ꢀ/1&'
$4+)*60'55
%1064#56
%1.14
014/#.
ꢅꢆ
ꢅꢆ
ꢅꢆ
ꢅꢆ
ꢀꢄ
Select an item using the ▲/▼ cursor buttons on the
projector or remote control. Then perform it according to the
following table.
6+06
5*#420'55
9*+52'4
/+4414
014/#.
014/#.
4'5'6
(+.6'4ꢀ6+/'
.#0)7#)'
ꢀꢀꢀꢆJ
'0).+5*
ꢀ)QꢀVQꢀ#FXCPEGFꢀ/GPWꢇꢇꢇ
Item
Description
Using the ◄/► buttons switches the mode for aspect ratio.
ASPECT
See the ASPECT item in IMAGE menu ( 30).
AUTO
KEYSTONE
EXECUTE
Using the ► button executes the auto keystone function.
See the AUTO KEYSTONE
EXECUTE item in SETUP menu
(
36).
Using the ◄/► buttons corrects the vertical keystone distortion.
See the KEYSTONE item in SETUP menu ( 36).
KEYSTONE
KEYSTONE
Using the ◄/► buttons corrects the horizontal keystone distortion.
See the KEYSTONE item in SETUP menu ( 37).
Using the ◄/► buttons switches the picture mode.
The picture modes are combinations of GAMMA and COLOR
TEMP settings. Choose a suitable mode according to the projected
source.
NORMAL
CINEMA
DYNAMIC
ó
ó
WHITEBOARD
BOARD(GREEN)
BOARD(BLACK)
ó
ó
COLOR TEMP
MID DEFAULT
LOW DEFAULT
HIGH DEFAULT
Hi-BRIGHT-ꢀ DEFAULT
Hi-BRIGHT-ꢁ DEFAULT
MID DEFAULT
GAMMA
NORMAL
CINEMA
DYNAMIC
BOARD(BLACK)
BOARD(GREEN)
WHITEBOARD
#ꢀ DEFAULT
#ꢁ DEFAULT
#3 DEFAULT
#4 DEFAULT
#4 DEFAULT
#5 DEFAULT
PICTURE MODE
• When the combination of GAMMA and COLOR TEMP differs
from pre-assigned modes above, the display on the menu for the
PICTURE MODE is “CUSTOM”. Please refer to the GAMMA ( 27)
and COLOR TEMP ( 28) items in PICTURE menu.
•
When this function is performed, a certain extra such as a line may appear.
(continued on next page)
ꢁ5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EASY Menu
EASY Menu (continued)
Item
Description
Using the ◄/► buttons adjusts the brightness.
See the BRIGHTNESS item in PICTURE menu ( 27).
BRIGHTNESS
CONTRAST
COLOR
Using the ◄/► buttons adjusts the contrast.
See the CONTRAST item in PICTURE menu
(
27).
Using the ◄/► buttons adjusts the strength of whole color.
See the COLOR item in PICTURE menu ( 28).
Using the ◄/► buttons adjusts the tint.
TINT
See the TINT item in PICTURE menu ( 28).
Using the ◄/► buttons adjusts the sharpness.
See the SHARPNESS item in PICTURE menu
SHARPNESS
WHISPER
MIRROR
(
28).
Using the ◄/► buttons turns off/on the whisper mode.
See the WHISPER item in SETUP menu ( 37).
Using the ◄/► buttons switches the mode for mirror status.
See the MIRROR item in SETUP menu ( 37).
Performing this item resets all of the EASY MENU items except the
FILTER TIME and LANGUAGE.
A dialog is displayed for confirmation. Selecting the RESET using
the ▲ button performs resetting.
RESET
Performing this item resets the filter time which counts usage time
of the air filter.
A dialog is displayed for confirmation. Selecting the RESET using
the ▲ button performs resetting.
FILTER TIME
LANGUAGE
See the FILTER TIME item in OPTION menu ( 44).
Using the ◄/► buttons changes the display language.
See the LANGUAGE item in SCREEN menu
(
39).
Select “Go to Advanced Menu…” on the menu, and press the
or ENTER button to use the menu of PICTURE, IMAGE, INPUT,
SETUP, AUDIO, SCREEN, OPTION or NETWORK.
►
Go to
Advanced Menu...
ꢁ6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PICTURE Menu
PICTURE Menu
ꢀ/'07ꢀ=4)$ꢁ?
ꢀ2+%674'ꢀ
ꢀ
+/#)'ꢀ
ꢀ+0276ꢀ
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢄ5'.'%6ꢀ
From the PICTURE menu, items shown in the table below
can be performed.
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ$4+)*60'55ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ㧗ꢃ
ꢀ%1064#56ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ㧗ꢃ
ꢀ)#//#ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ&'(#7.6ꢀꢁꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
%1.14ꢀ6'/2ꢀꢀꢀ/+&
%1.14ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ㧗ꢃ
Select an item using the ▲/▼ cursor buttons on the
projector or remote control, and press the ► cursor button
on the projector or remote control, or the ENTER button
on the remote control to execute the item. Then perform it
according to the following table.
5'672ꢀ
ꢀ#7&+1
ꢀ5%4''0
ꢀ126+10
ꢀ/+7
ꢀ6+06ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ㧗ꢃ
ꢀ5*#420'55ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢂꢀ
ꢀ#%6+8'ꢀ+4+5ꢀꢀꢀ6740ꢀ1((
ꢀ'#5;ꢀ/'07 ꢀ/;ꢀ/'/14;ꢀꢀꢀꢀ5#8'ꢀꢁ
Item
Description
Using the ▲/▼ buttons adjusts the brightness.
BRIGHTNESS
Light
Dark
ó
Using the ▲/▼ buttons adjusts the contrast.
Strong Weak
CONTRAST
ó
Using the ▲/▼ buttons switches the gamma mode.
#ꢀ DEFAULT #ꢀ CUSTOM
#ꢁ DEFAULT
#ꢁ CUSTOM
#3 DEFAULT
ó
ó
ó
ó
ó
3
#5 CUSTOM
#5 DEFAULT
#4 CUSTOM
#4 DEFAULT
#3 CUSTOM
ó
ó
ó
To adjust CUSTOM
ENTER :
1
2
4
5
6
7
8
Selecting a mode whose name includes
CUSTOM and then pressing the ► button
or the ENTER button displays a dialog to aid
you in adjusting the mode.
This function is useful when you want to
change the brightness of particular tones.
+0 +0 +0 +0 +0 +0 +0 +0
[
]
GAMMA CUSTOM 1
Choose an item using the ◄/► buttons, and
adjust the level using the ▲/▼ buttons.
GAMMA
You can display a test pattern for checking the effect of your
adjustment by pressing the ENTER button.
Each time you press the ENTER button, the pattern changes as
below.
No pattern Gray scale of 9 steps
ð
Ramp Gray scale of ꢀ5 steps
The eight equalizing bars correspond to eight tone levels of the test
pattern except the darkest in the left end. If you want to adjust the
ꢁnd tone from left end on the test pattern (Gray scale of 9 steps),
use the equalizing adjustment bar “ꢀ”. The darkest tone at the left
end of the test pattern cannot be controlled with any of equalizing
adjustment bar.
• When this function is performed, lines or other distortion may
appear.
(continued on next page)
ꢁ7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PICTURE Menu
PICTURE Menu (continued)
Item
Description
Using the ▲/▼ buttons switches the color temperature mode.
HIGH DEFAULT � HIGH CUSTOM � MID DEFAULT � MID CUSTOM
LOW DEFAULT
�
LOW CUSTOM
�
Hi-BRIGHT-1 DEFAULT
�
Hi-BRIGHT-1 CUSTOM
Hi-BRIGHT-2 DEFAULT � Hi-BRIGHT-2 CUSTOM
To adjust CUSTOM
Selecting a mode whose name includes
ENTER
:
CUSTOM and then pressing the ► button or the
ENTER button displays a dialog to aid you in
adjusting the OFFSET and GAIN of the selected
mode.
OFFSET
GAIN
R
G
B
R
G
B
+0 +0 +0
+0 +0 +0
OFFSET adjustments change the color intensity
on the whole tones of the test pattern.
COLOR TEMP [CUSTOM-1]
COLOR TEMP
GAIN adjustments mainly affect color intensity
on the brighter tones of the test pattern.
Choose an item using the ◄/► buttons, and adjust the level using
the ▲/▼ buttons.
You can display a test pattern for checking the effect of your
adjustment by pressing the ENTER button.
Each time you press the ENTER button, the pattern changes as
below.
No pattern Gray scale of 9 steps
ð
Ramp Gray scale of ꢀ5 steps
• When this function is performed, lines or other distortion may
appear.
Using the ▲/▼ buttons adjusts the strength of whole color.
Strong
Weak
ó
COLOR
TINT
• This item can be selected only for a video signal, s-video or
component video signal.
Using the ▲/▼ buttons adjusts the tint.
Greenish
Reddish
ó
• This item can be selected only for a video signal, s-video or
component video signal.
Using the ▲/▼ buttons adjusts the sharpness.
Strong
Weak
ó
SHARPNESS
• There may be some noise and/or the screen may flicker for a
moment when an adjustment is made. This is not a malfunction.
(continued on next page)
ꢁ8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PICTURE Menu
PICTURE Menu (continued)
Item
Description
Using the ▲/▼ cursor buttons changes the active iris control mode.
PRESENTATION
THEATER
TURN OFF
ó
ó
Feature
The active iris displays the best presentation
image for both bright and dark scenes.
PRESENTATION
ACTIVE IRIS
The active iris displays the best theater image for
both bright and dark scenes.
THEATER
TURN OFF
The active iris is always open.
• The screen may flicker when the PRESENTATION or THEATER
modes are selected. If this occurs select TURN OFF.
This projector has 4 memories for adjustment data (for all the items
of the PICTURE menu).
Selecting a function using the ▲/▼ buttons and pressing the ► or
ENTER button performs each function.
LOADꢀ
LOADꢁ
LOAD3
LOAD4
ó
ó
ó
SAVE4 SAVE3
SAVEꢁ
SAVEꢀ
ó
ó
ó
LOAD1, LOAD2, LOAD3, LOAD4
Performing a LOAD function loads the data from the memory linked
in the number included in the function’s name, and adjusts the
picture automatically depending on the data.
• The LOAD functions whose linked memory has no data are
skipped.
• Remember that the current adjusted condition will be lost by
loading data. If you want to keep the current adjustment, please
save it before performing a LOAD function.
MY MEMORY
• There may be some noise and the screen may flicker for a
moment when loading data. This is not malfunction.
• The LOAD functions can be also performed by the MY MEMORY
button which can be set by the MY BUTTON item in OPTION menu
(
45).
SAVE1, SAVE2, SAVE3, SAVE4
Performing a SAVE function saves the current adjustment data into
the memory linked in the number included in the function’s name.
• Remember that the current data being stored of a memory will be
lost by saving a new data into the memory.
ꢁ9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IMAGE Menu
IMAGE Menu
ꢀ/'07ꢀ=4)$ꢁ?
ꢀ2+%674'ꢀ
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢂ5'.'%6ꢀ
From the IMAGE menu, items shown in the table below
can be performed.
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ#52'%6ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢃꢂꢄꢀ
ꢀ18'4ꢀ5%#0ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅꢀ
ꢀ8ꢀ215+6+10ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢇꢅꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
+/#)'ꢀ
ꢀ+0276ꢀ
Select an item using the ▲/▼ cursor buttons on the
projector or remote control, and press the ► cursor button
on the projector or remote control, or ENTER button on
the remote control to execute the item. Then perform it
according to the following table.
ꢀ
ꢀ
*ꢀ215+6+10ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢁꢃꢇꢀ
ꢀꢀ
ꢀ
5'672ꢀ
ꢀ#7&+1
*ꢀ2*#5'ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ ꢁꢆꢀ
ꢀ*ꢀ5+<'ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢁꢄꢃꢃꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ5%4''0
ꢀ126+10
ꢀ/+7
#761ꢀ#&,756ꢀ':'%76'ꢀ
ꢀ'#5;ꢀ/'07
Item
Description
Using the ▲/▼ buttons switches the mode for aspect ratio.
For an RGB or MIU signal
NORMAL
4:3 SMALL
ꢀ6:9
ó ó ó
For an M1-D signal
NORMAL 4:3
ꢀ6:9 SMALL
ꢀ4:9
ó ó ó ó
ASPECT
For a Video signal, S-video signal or Component video signal
4:3 ꢀ6:9 ꢀ4:9 SMALL
ó ó ó
For no signal
4:3 (fixed)
• The NORMAL mode keeps the original aspect ratio of the signal.
Using the ▲/▼ buttons adjusts the over-scan ratio.
Large (It reduces picture)
This item can be selected only for a video, s-video and component signal.
• When this adjustment is too large, certain degradation may appear
at the frame area of the picture. In such a case, please adjust small.
Small (It magnifies picture)
ó
OVER SCAN
V POSITION
•
Using the ▲/▼ buttons adjusts the vertical position.
Up
Down
ó
•
Over-adjusting the vertical position may cause noise to appear on the screen. If this
occurs please reset the vertical position to the default setting. Pressing the RESET button
when the V POSITION is selected will reset the V POSITION to the default setting.
When this function is performed on a video signal, s-video signal, or
component video signal of 5ꢁ5i (480i) or 6ꢁ5i (576i), the range of this
adjustment depends on the OVER SCAN
possible to adjust when the OVER SCAN is set to ꢀ0.
•
(
above) setting. It is not
Using the ▲/▼ buttons adjusts the horizontal position.
Left
Right
ó
•
Over-adjusting the horizontal position may cause noise to appear on the screen. If this
occurs please reset the horizontal position to the default setting. Pressing the RESET
button when the H POSITION is selected will reset the H POSITION to the default setting.
H POSITION
•
When this function is performed on a video signal, s-video signal, or
component video signal of 5ꢁ5i (480i) or 6ꢁ5i (576i), the range of this
adjustment depends on the OVER SCAN above) setting. It is not
(
possible to adjust when the OVER SCAN is set to ꢀ0.
(continued on next page)
30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IMAGE Menu
IMAGE Menu (continued)
Item
Description
Using the ▲/▼ buttons adjusts the horizontal phase to eliminate flicker.
Right Left
ó
H PHASE
• This item can be selected only for an RGB signal, an MIU signal or
a component video signal. (except 5ꢁ5i (480i), 6ꢁ5i (576i), SCART
RGB)
Using the ▲/▼ buttons adjusts the horizontal size.
Large
Small
ó
• This item can be selected only for an RGB signal.
H SIZE
• When this adjustment is excessive, the picture may not be
displayed correctly. In such a case, please reset the adjustment
by pressing the RESET button on the remote control during this
operation.
Selecting this item performs the automatic adjustment feature.
For an RGB or MIU signal
The vertical position, the horizontal position, the horizontal phase
and the horizontal size will be automatically set to default. And the
aspect ratio will be automatically selected.
Make sure that the application window is set to its maximum size
prior to attempting to use this feature. A dark picture may still be
incorrectly adjusted. Use a bright picture when adjusting.
For an M1-D signal
The aspect ratio will be automatically set to default.
For a Video signal or S-video signal
The video format best suited for the respective input signal will be
selected automatically.
AUTO ADJUST
EXECUTE
This function is available only when the AUTO mode is selected to
the VIDEO FORMAT item in INPUT menu ( 33). For a component
video signal, the signal type is identified automatically independently
of this function.
For a Video signal, S-video signal or Component video signal
The vertical position, horizontal position and aspect ratio will be
automatically set to default.
For a Component video signal
The horizontal phase will be automatically set to default.
• The automatic adjustment operation requires about ꢀ0 seconds.
Also please note that it may not function correctly with some input.
3ꢀ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INPUT Menu
INPUT Menu
ꢀ/'07ꢀ=4)$ꢁ?
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢂ5'.'%6ꢀ
From the INPUT menu, items shown in the table below can
be performed.
ꢀ
ꢀ241)4'55+8'ꢀꢀ68
ꢀ
ꢀ2+%674'
ꢀ+/#)'
ꢀ+0276
ꢀ8+&'1ꢀ04ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ/+&
ꢀꢃ&ꢄ;%5ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ56+..
ꢀ%1.14ꢀ52#%'ꢀꢀ#761
ꢀ%1/210'06ꢀꢀꢀꢀ%1/210'06
Select an item using the ▲/▼ cursor buttons on the
projector or remote control, and press the ► cursor button
on the projector or remote control, or ENTER button on
the remote control to execute the item. Then perform it
according to the following table.
ꢀ5'672
ꢀ#7&+1
ꢀ8+&'1ꢀ(14/#6ꢀ#761
ꢀ
ꢀ5%4''0
ꢀ126+10
ꢀ/+7
ꢀ/ꢁꢄ&ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ014/#.
ꢀ(4#/'ꢀ.1%-ꢀꢀꢀ6740ꢀ10
ꢀ4)$ꢀ+0
ꢀ'#5;ꢀ/'07
ꢀ4'51.76+10
Item
Description
Using the ▲/▼ buttons switches the progress mode.
TV FILM TURN OFF
ó ó
• This function is performed only for an interlaced signal of a VIDEO
input, an S-VIDEO input or COMPONENT VIDEO input of 5ꢁ5i
(480i), 6ꢁ5i (576i) or ꢀꢀꢁ5i (ꢀ080i) signal.
PROGRESSIVE
• When TV or FILM is selected, the screen image will be sharp.
FILM adapts to the ꢁ-3 Pull-Down conversion system. But these
may cause a certain defect (for example, jagged line) of the picture
for a quick moving object. In such a case, please select TURN OFF,
even though the screen image may lose the sharpness.
Using the ▲/▼ buttons switches the noise reduction mode.
HIGH
MID LOW
ó ó
• This function performs only at a VIDEO input, an S-VIDEO or
COMPONENT VIDEO input of 5ꢁ5i(480i), 6ꢁ5i(576i) or ꢀꢀꢁ5i (ꢀ080i)
signal.
VIDEO NR
• When this function is excessive, it may cause a certain
degradation of the picture.
Using the ▲/▼ buttons switches the 3D-YCS mode.
STILL
MOVIE
TURN OFF
ó
ó
• This function performs only at a VIDEO input of NTSC, and PAL.
3D-YCS
• MOVIE is the mode for images with a lot of motions like movies,
and STILL is the mode for images with few motions or completely
still ones like slides.
Using the ▲/▼ buttons switches the mode for color space.
AUTO
RGB
ó ó
SMPTEꢁ40
REC709
REC60ꢀ
ó
ó
• This item can be selected only for an RGB signal or a component
video signal (except 5ꢁ5i (480i), 6ꢁ5i (576i) and SCART RGB).
COLOR SPACE
• The AUTO mode automatically selects the optimum mode.
• The AUTO operation may not work well at some signals. In such a
case, it might be good to select a suitable mode except AUTO.
(continued on next page)
3ꢁ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INPUT Menu
INPUT Menu (continued)
Item
Description
Using the ▲/▼ buttons switches the function of the COMPONENT
(Y, Cb/Pb, Cr/Pr) port.
COMPONENT
SCART RGB
ó
When the SCART RGB is selected, the COMPONENT (Y, Cb/Pb,
Cr/Pr) and VIDEO ports will function as a SCART RGB port. A
SCART adapter or SCART cable is required for a SCART RGB
input to the projector. For details, contact your dealer.
Y
CB/PB
VIDEO
AUDIO IN
AUDIO IN
1
2
COMPONENT
CR/PR
S-VIDEO
R
L
R
L
AUDIO IN
3
AUDIO IN
4
Video G B R
SCART OUT
Set the video format for the s-video port and video port.
(ꢀ) Use the ◄/► buttons to select the input port.
8+&'1ꢀ(14/#6
5ꢁ8+&'1 8+&'1
(2) Using the ▲/▼ buttons switches the mode
for video format.
#761
065%
2#.
AUTO
NTSC
PAL SECAM
ó ó
ó
5'%#/
065%ꢂꢃꢂꢄ
/ꢁ2#.
0ꢁ2#.
N-PAL
M-PAL NTSC4.43
ó
ó
VIDEO FORMAT
• This item is performed only for a video signal
from the VIDEO port or the S-VIDEO port.
• The AUTO mode automatically selects the optimum mode.
• The AUTO operation may not work well for some signals. If the
picture becomes unstable (e.g. an irregular picture, lack of color),
please select the mode according to the input signal.
Using the ▲/▼ cursor buttons changes the M1-D signal mode.
NORMAL
ENHANCED
ó
Feature
M1-D
NORMAL
ENHANCED
Suitable for DVD signals (ꢀ6-ꢁ35)
Suitable for VGA signals (0-ꢁ55)
• If the contrast of the screen image is too strong or too weak, try
finding a more suitable mode.
(continued on next page)
33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INPUT Menu
INPUT Menu (continued)
Item
Description
Using the ▲/▼ buttons turns the frame lock function on/off.
TURN ON TURN OFF
ó
• This item can be performed only on an RGB signal with a vertical
frequency of 50 to 60 Hz.
• When the TURN ON is selected, a moving pictures are displayed
more smoothly.
FRAME LOCK
• This function may cause a certain degradation of the picture. In
such a case, please select the TURN OFF.
Set the RGB input signal type for the RGB port.
(ꢀ) Use the ◄/► buttons to select the RGB
port to be set.
4)$ꢀ+0
4)$ꢁ
4)$ꢂ
5;0%ꢀ10ꢀ)ꢀ10
5;0%ꢀ10ꢀ)ꢀ1((
RGBꢀ RGBꢁ
ó
(2) Use the ▲/▼ buttons to select the RGB
input signal type.
RGB IN
SYNC ON G ON
SYNC ON G OFF
ó
• Selecting the SYNC ON G ON turns the SYNC ON G mode on.
The SYNC ON G mode allows reception of a sync on G signal.
• In the SYNC ON G mode, the picture may be distorted with certain
input signals. In such a case, remove the signal connector so that
no signal is received and turn the SYNC ON G mode off, and then
reconnect the signal.
(continued on next page)
34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INPUT Menu
INPUT Menu (continued)
Item
Description
The resolution for the RGBꢀ and RGBꢁ input signals can be set on
this projector.
(1) In the INPUT menu select the RESOLUTION using the ▲/▼ buttons and
press the ► button.
ꢀꢀꢀ4'51.76+10
The RESOLUTION menu will be displayed.
#761
ꢁꢂꢃꢄZꢀꢅꢆꢇ
ꢁꢃꢇꢂZꢀꢅꢆꢇ
ꢁꢈꢆꢂZꢀꢅꢆꢇ
(ꢁ) In the RESOLUTION menu select the
resolution you wish to display using the ▲/▼
buttons.
56#0&
Selecting AUTO will set a resolution
%7561/
ꢁꢄꢄꢂZꢀꢅꢆꢇ
appropriate to the input signal.
RESOLUTION MENU
(3) Pressing the ► or ENTER button when
selecting a STANDARD resolution will
automatically adjust the horizontal and
vertical positions, clock phase and horizontal
size and automatically select an aspect ratio.
INFORMATION
RGBꢀ
ꢀꢁ80x 768@ 60
The INFORMATION dialog ( 47) will be
displayed.
(4) To set a custom resolution use the
▲/▼ buttons to select the CUSTOM and
the CUSTOM RESOLUTION BOX will be
displayed. Set the horizontal (HORZ) and
vertical (VERT) resolutions using the
▲/▼/◄/► buttons.
%7561/ꢀ4'51.76+10
ꢁ*14<ꢂꢀZꢀꢁ8'46ꢂ
RESOLUTION
ꢃꢄꢄꢅꢀZꢀꢃꢆꢇꢇ
37+6
5'6
CUSTOM RESOLUTION
BOX
Although not all resolutions are guaranteed.
INFORMATION
RGBꢀ
(5) To save the setting place the cursor on the
right-most digit and press the ► button.
The horizontal and vertical positions,
clock phase and horizontal size will be
automatically adjusted and an aspect ratio will
be automatically selected.
99ꢁx 744@ 60
ꢀꢀꢀ4'51.76+10
#761
After the INFORMATION( 47) dialog has
ꢁꢂꢃꢄZꢀꢅꢆꢇ
ꢁꢃꢇꢂZꢀꢅꢆꢇ
ꢁꢈꢆꢂZꢀꢅꢆꢇ
56#0&
displayed for about ꢀ0 seconds the screen will
return to the RESOLUTION menu displaying
the changed resolution.
%7561/
ꢀꢉꢉꢃZꢀꢅꢄꢄ
(6) To revert back to the previous resolution
without saving changes place the cursor on
the left-most digit and press the ◄ button.
The screen will then return to the RESOLUTION menu displaying the
previous resolution.
• For some pictures, this function may not work well.
35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SETUP Menu
SETUP Menu
ꢀ/'07ꢀ=4)$ꢁ?
ꢀꢀꢀꢂ5'.'%6ꢀ
From the SETUP menu, items shown in the table below
can be performed.
Select an item using the ▲/▼ cursor buttons on the
projector or remote control, and press the ► cursor button
on the projector or remote control, or the ENTER button
on the remote control to execute the item. Then perform it
according to the following table.
ꢀ
ꢀ#761ꢀ-';5610'ꢀꢀꢀ':'%76'
ꢀ
ꢀ2+%674'
ꢀ+/#)'
ꢀ+0276
ꢀ5'672
ꢀ-';5610'ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢃꢄ
ꢀ-';5610'ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢃꢄ
ꢀ9*+52'4ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ014/#.
ꢀ/+4414ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ014/#.
ꢀ#7&+1
ꢀ5%4''0
ꢀ126+10
ꢀ/+7
ꢀ'#5;ꢀ/'07
Item
Description
Selecting this item performs the Automatic keystone distortion
correction. Projector automatically corrects vertical keystone
distortion due to the (forward/backward) setup angle by itself.
This function will be executed only once when selected in the menu.
When the slant of the projector is changed, execute this function
again.
• The adjustable range of this function will vary among inputs. For
some input, this function may not work well.
• When V:INVERT or H&V:INVERT is selected to the MIRROR item
in the SETUP menu, if the projector screen is inclined or angled
downward, this function may not work correctly.
• When the zoom adjustment is set to the TELE (telephoto focus),
this function may be excessive. This function should be used when
the zoom adjustment is set to the full WIDE (wide-angle focus)
whenever possible.
AUTO
KEYSTONE
EXECUTE
• When the projector is placed on the level (about ±3°), this function
may not work.
• When the projector is inclined to near ±30 degree or over, this
function may not work well.
• When the vertical lens shift is not set fully upward (not set fully
downward for the optional lens type FL-60ꢀ only ( 46)), this
function may not work well.
• When the horizontal lens shift is not set to the center, this function
may not work well.
• This function will be unavailable when the Transition Detector is
on ( 52).
Using the ▲/▼ buttons corrects the vertical keystone distortion.
Shrink the top of the image
Shrink the bottom of the image
ó
• The adjustable range of this function will vary among inputs. For
some input, this function may not work well.
• When the horizontal lens shift is not set to the center, this function
may not work well.
KEYSTONE
• This function will be unavailable when the Transition Detector is
on ( 52).
(continued on next page)
36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SETUP Menu
SETUP Menu (continued)
Item
Description
Using the ▲/▼ buttons corrects the horizontal keystone distortion.
Shrink the right of the image Shrink the left of the image
ó
• The adjustable range of this function will vary among inputs. For
some input, this function may not work well.
• When the zoom adjustment is set to the TELE (telephoto focus),
this function may be excessive. This function should be used when
the zoom adjustment is set to the full WIDE (wide-angle focus)
whenever possible.
KEYSTONE
• When the vertical lens shift is not set fully upward (not set fully
downward for the optional lens type FL-60ꢀ only ( 46)), this
function may not work well.
• This function will be unavailable when the Transition Detector is
on ( 52).
Using the ▲/▼ buttons turns off/on the whisper mode.
NORMAL
WHISPER
ó
WHISPER
MIRROR
• When the WHISPER is selected, acoustic noise and screen
brightness are reduced.
Using the ▲/▼ buttons switches the mode for mirror status.
NORMAL
H:INVERT
V:INVERT
H&V:INVERT
ó
ó
ó
If the Transition Detector is TURN ON and MIRROR status is
changed, Transition Detector Alarm ( 52) will be displayed when
projector is restarted after the power switch is turned off.
37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AUDIO Menu
AUDIO Menu
ꢀ/'07ꢀ=4)$ꢁ?
ꢀ2+%674'ꢀ
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢂ5'.'%6ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢁꢃ
ꢄꢅ
ꢄꢅ
From the AUDIO menu, items shown in the table below can
be performed.
ꢀ
ꢀ81.7/'
ꢀ64'$.'
ꢀ$#55
ꢀ
+/#)'ꢀ
ꢀ+0276ꢀ
ꢀ
Select an item using the ▲/▼ cursor buttons on the
projector or remote control, and press the ► cursor button
on the projector or remote control, or ENTER button on
the remote control to execute the item. Then perform it
according to the following table.
ꢀ545ꢀ919
ꢀ52'#-'4
ꢀ#7&+1
/+&
6740ꢀ10
ꢀ5'672
ꢀ#7&+1
ꢀ
ꢀ5%4''0
ꢀ126+10
ꢀ/+7
ꢀ'#5;ꢀ/'07
NOTE • The speaker sound may distorted or the case may be trembling
when the volume is too high or treble/bass is emphasized or WOW is activated.
In that case, make the volume reduced, bass/treble low or WOW effect to be
weakend.
Item
Description
Using the ▲/▼ buttons adjusts the volume.
VOLUME
High
Low
ó
Using the ▲/▼ buttons adjusts the treble level.
High Low
TREBLE
BASS
ó
Using the ▲/▼ buttons adjusts the bass level.
High Low
ó
Using the ▲/▼ buttons switches the mode for SRS WOW mode.
HIGH MID OFF
ó ó
SRS WOW
• SRS WOW™ accomplishes this by providing a panoramic three-
dimensional audio image that extends the sound field in both the
horizontal and vertical planes, and lowers the perceived bass
response well beyond the low frequency limitations of the drivers.
Adjust it depending on the user's preference.
Using the ▲/▼ buttons turns the speaker function on/off.
SPEAKER
TURN ON
TURN OFF
ó
• When the TURN ON is selected the built-in speaker works.
Allocates the audio ports.
ꢀ#7&+1
(1) Choose a picture input port using the ▲/▼
buttons.
ꢀꢀꢀ37+6ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢂ
ꢁ
ꢄ
ꢅ
ꢀꢀ
ꢀ4)$ꢂꢀ
ꢀ
4)$ꢁ
ꢀ/ꢂꢃ&
RGBꢀ RGBꢁ Mꢀ-D MIU
ó
ó
ó
ꢀ%1/210'06
ꢀ5ꢃ8+&'1
ꢀ8+&'1
VIDEO
S-VIDEO
COMPONENT
ó
ó
AUDIO
(ꢁ) Select the audio port to be interlocked with
the input port using the ◄/► buttons.
ꢀ
ꢁ
3
4
M
ó ó ó ó ó
“M” is abbreviation of MIU. When is selected to an input port, any
audio ports do not work interlocking with the input port, and any
items in AUDIO menu are invalid.
38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SCREEN Menu
SCREEN Menu
ꢀ/'07ꢀ=4)$ꢁ?
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢂ5'.'%6ꢀ
From the SCREEN menu, items shown in the table below
can be performed.
Select an item using the ▲/▼ cursor buttons on the
projector or remote control, and press the ► cursor button
on the projector or remote control, or ENTER button on
the remote control to execute the item. Then perform it
according to the following table.
ꢀ
ꢀ.#0)7#)'ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ'0).+5*ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ2+%674'
ꢀ+/#)'
ꢀ+0276
ꢀ5'672
ꢀ/'07ꢀ215+6+10ꢀ
ꢀꢀ$.#0-ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ$.#%-
ꢀ
56#46ꢀ72ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ14+)+0#.
ꢀ/[5ETGGP
ꢀ/[5ETGGPꢀ.QEMꢀ6740ꢀ1((
ꢀ#7&+1
ꢀ5%4''0
ꢀ126+10
ꢀ/'55#)'ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ6740ꢀ10
ꢀ5174%'ꢀ0#/'
ꢀ/+7
ꢀ'#5;ꢀ/'07
Item
Description
Using the ▲/▼ buttons switches the OSD (On Screen Display) language.
ENGLISH óFRANÇAIS óDEUTSCH óESPAÑOL óITALIANO
NORSK óNEDERLANDS óPORTUGUÊS ó日本語
LANGUAGE
ó
ó óSVENSKA ó
SUOMI óPOLSKI óTÜRKÇE
Using the ◄/►/▲/▼ buttons adjusts the menu position.
MENU POSITION To quit the operation, press the MENU button on the remote control
or keep no operation for about ꢀ0 seconds.
Using the ▲/▼ buttons switches the mode for the blank screen.
The blank screen is a screen for the temporarily blanking feature
(
23). It is displayed by pressing the BLANK button on the remote
control.
MyScreen
ORIGINAL
BLUE
WHITE
BLACK
ó
ó
ó
ó
Feature
Screen can be registered by the MyScreen item
BLANK
MyScreen
ORIGINAL
.
41)
(
Screen preset as the standard screen.
BLUE, WHITE,
BLACK
Plain screens in each color.
• To avoid remaining as an afterimage, the MyScreen or ORIGINAL
screen will change to the plain black screen after several minutes.
(continued on next page)
39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SCREEN Menu
SCREEN Menu (continued)
Item
Description
Using the ▲/▼ buttons switches the mode for the start-up screen.
The start-up screen is a screen displayed when no signal or an
unsuitable signal is detected.
MyScreen
ORIGINAL
TURN OFF
ó
ó
Feature
Screen can be registered by the MyScreen item
MyScreen
.
41)
(
START UP
ORIGINAL
TURN OFF
Screen preset as the standard screen.
Plain black screen.
• To avoid remaining as an afterimage, the MyScreen or ORIGINAL
screen will change to the BLANK screen ( 39) after several
minutes. If also the BLANK screen is the MyScreen or ORIGINAL,
the plain black screen is instead used.
• When the TURN ON is selected to the MyScreen PASSWARD of
SECURITY item in OPTION menu ( 49), the START UP is fixed to
MyScreen.
(continued on next page)
40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SCREEN Menu
SCREEN Menu (continued)
Item
Description
This item allows you to capture an image for use as a MyScreen
image which can be used as the BLANK screen and START UP
screen. Display the image you want to capture before executing the
following procedure.
ꢀ. Selecting this item displays a dialog
/[5ETGGP
&Qꢀ[QWꢀUVCTVꢀECRVWTKPIꢀVJKUꢀRKEVWTG!
titled “MyScreen”. It will ask you if
you start capturing an image from the
current screen.
ꢀ
'
5
%
ꢀꢁꢀꢂ01ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢁꢀꢀꢀꢂ;'5
'06
Please wait for the target image to be displayed, and press
the ENTER button on the remote control when the image is
displayed. The image will freeze and the frame for capturing will
appear.
To stop performing, press the RESET or ESC button on the
remote control.
2. Using the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons adjusts
the frame position.
Please move the frame to the position
of the image which you want to use. The
frame may not be able to be moved for
/[5ETGGP
/QXGꢀVJGꢀECRVWTGꢀCTGC
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀCUꢀ[QWꢀYCPVꢁ
MyScreen
ꢀꢂꢀꢃꢀꢄ4'6740ꢀꢀꢂꢀꢄ0':6
4'5'6
'06'4
some input signals.
To start registration, press the ENTER
button on the remote control.
/[5ETGGP
ٕ
ٌ
ꢀꢁꢂ
To restore the screen and return to the previous dialog, press the
RESET or ESC button on the remote control.
Registration takes several minutes.
When the registration is completed, the registered screen and the
following message is displayed for several seconds:
“MyScreen registration is finished.”
If the registration failed, the following message is displayed:
“A capturing error has occurred. Please try again.”
• This item cannot be selected for an Mꢀ-D signal.
• This function cannot be selected when the TURN ON is selected
to the MyScreen Lock item ( below).
• This function cannot be selected when the TURN ON is selected
to the MyScreen PASSWARD of SECURITY item in OPTION menu
(
49).
Using the ▲/▼ buttons turns on/off the MyScreen lock function.
TURN ON TURN OFF
ó
When the TURN ON is selected, the item MyScreen is locked. Use
MyScreen Lock this function for protecting the current MyScreen.
• This function cannot be selected when the TURN ON is selected
to the MyScreen PASSWARD of SECURITY item in OPTION menu
49).
(
(continued on next page)
4ꢀ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SCREEN Menu
SCREEN Menu (continued)
Item
Description
Using the ▲/▼ buttons turns on/off the message function.
TURN ON TURN OFF
ó
When the TURN ON is selected, the following message function works.
“AUTO IN PROGRESS” while automatically adjusting
“NO INPUT IS DETECTED”
“SYNC IS OUT OF RANGE”
“Searching….” while searching for the input
“Detecting….” while an input signal is detected
The indication of the input signal displayed by changing
The indication of the aspect ratio displayed by changing
The indication of the PICTURE MODE displayed by changing
The indication of the ACTIVE IRIS displayed by changing
The indication of the MY MEMORY displayed by changing
The indication of "FREEZE" and "II" while freezing the screen by
pressing the FREEZE button.
MESSAGE
• When the TURN OFF is selected, please remember if the picture
is freezing. Do not mistake freezing for a malfunction ( 22).
Each input port for this projector can have a name applied to it.
(ꢀ) Use the ▲/▼ buttons on the SCREEN menu to
5174%'ꢀ0#/'
select SOURCE NAME and press the
►
button.
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ4)$ꢁꢀꢂꢀ
The SOURCE NAME menu will be displayed.
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ4)$ꢃꢀꢂꢀ&'5-612ꢀ2%
%1/210'06ꢀꢂꢀ&8&
ꢀꢀ5ꢄ8+&'1ꢀꢂꢀ%#/'4#
ꢀꢀꢀꢀ8+&'1ꢀꢂꢀ864
(2) Use the ▲/▼ buttons on the SOURCE
NAME menu to select the port to be named
and press the ► button. Right side of the
menu is blank until a name is specified.
The SOURCE NAME dialog will be displayed.
ꢁ5'.'%6ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ0#/'ꢁꢀ4)$ꢂ
ꢀ4ꢀ)ꢀ$ꢀꢂ
#ꢀ$ꢀ%ꢀ&ꢀ'ꢀ(ꢀ)ꢀ*ꢀ+ꢀ,ꢀ-ꢀ.ꢀ/ꢀ0
1ꢀ2ꢀ3ꢀ4ꢀ5ꢀ6ꢀ7ꢀ8ꢀ9ꢀ:ꢀ;ꢀ<
CꢀDꢀEꢀFꢀGꢀHꢀIꢀJꢀKꢀLꢀMꢀNꢀOꢀP
QꢀRꢀSꢀTꢀUꢀVꢀWꢀXꢀYꢀZꢀ[ꢀ\
ꢃꢀꢂꢀꢄꢀꢅꢀꢆꢀꢇꢀꢈꢀꢉꢀꢊꢀꢋ
ꢀ
(3) The current name will be displayed on the
first line. Use the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons and the
ENTER or INPUT button to select and enter
characters. The RESET button can be used to
erase ꢀ character at a time. The name can be a
maximum of ꢀ6 characters.
ꢀꢀꢌꢀAꢀꢍꢀꢎꢀꢏꢀ!ꢀꢐ
'5%ꢀꢑꢀꢀꢀꢒꢀꢀꢀꢁ37+6
'06'4ꢀꢑꢀꢁ0':6
ꢁ5'.'%6ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ0#/'ꢁꢀ4)$ꢂ
ꢀ4ꢀ)ꢀ$ꢀꢂ
SOURCE NAME
#ꢀ$ꢀ%ꢀ&ꢀ'ꢀ(ꢀ)ꢀ*ꢀ+ꢀ,ꢀ-ꢀ.ꢀ/ꢀ0
ꢀ
(4) To change an already inserted character, press
1ꢀ2ꢀ3ꢀ4ꢀ5ꢀ6ꢀ7ꢀ8ꢀ9ꢀ:ꢀ;ꢀ<
CꢀDꢀEꢀFꢀGꢀHꢀIꢀJꢀKꢀLꢀMꢀNꢀOꢀP
QꢀRꢀSꢀTꢀUꢀVꢀWꢀXꢀYꢀZꢀ[ꢀ\
ꢃꢀꢂꢀꢄꢀꢅꢀꢆꢀꢇꢀꢈꢀꢉꢀꢊꢀꢋ
the
▲
button while the cursor is on the [A-N]
row to move the cursor to the name displayed on
the first line and use the ◄/► buttons to select
character to be changed. Once a character in the
ꢀꢀꢌꢀAꢀꢍꢀꢎꢀꢏꢀ!ꢀꢐ
'5%ꢀꢑꢀꢀꢀꢒꢀꢀꢀꢁ37+6
ꢁ5'.'%6ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ0#/'ꢁꢀ4)$ꢂ
ꢀ4ꢀ)ꢀ$ꢀꢂ
name is selected use the
▼
button to move the
cursor back down to the character entry area to
select and enter characters as described above.
#ꢀ$ꢀ%ꢀ&ꢀ'ꢀ(ꢀ)ꢀ*ꢀ+ꢀ,ꢀ-ꢀ.ꢀ/ꢀ0
ꢀ
1ꢀ2ꢀ3ꢀ4ꢀ5ꢀ6ꢀ7ꢀ8ꢀ9ꢀ:ꢀ;ꢀ<
CꢀDꢀEꢀFꢀGꢀHꢀIꢀJꢀKꢀLꢀMꢀNꢀOꢀP
QꢀRꢀSꢀTꢀUꢀVꢀWꢀXꢀYꢀZꢀ[ꢀ\
ꢃꢀꢂꢀꢄꢀꢅꢀꢆꢀꢇꢀꢈꢀꢉꢀꢊꢀꢋ
(5) Select and press the ENTER or
INPUT buttons when finished entering text.
To revert to the previous name without
saving changes press the ESC or ◄ button
and the INPUT button simultaneously.
ꢀꢀꢌꢀAꢀꢍꢀꢎꢀꢏꢀ!ꢀꢐ
'5%ꢀꢑꢀꢀꢀꢒꢀꢀꢀꢁ37+6
'06'4ꢀꢑꢀꢁ0':6
4ꢁ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPTION Menu
OPTION Menu
ꢀ/'07ꢀ=4)$ꢁ?
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢂ5'.'%6ꢀ
From the OPTION menu, items shown in the table below can be
performed.
Select an item using the ▲/▼ cursor buttons on the projector or
remote control, and press the ► cursor button on the projector or
remote control, or ENTER button on the remote control to execute
the item, except for the items LAMP TIME and FILTER TIME.
Then perform it according to the following table.
ꢀ
ꢀ#761ꢀ5'#4%*ꢀꢀꢀ6740ꢀ1((
ꢀ
ꢀ2+%674'
ꢀ+/#)'
ꢀ+0276
ꢀ5'672
ꢀ#761ꢀ-';5610'ꢀꢀꢀ6740ꢀ1((
ꢀ#761ꢀ10ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ6740ꢀ1((
ꢀ#761ꢀ1((ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢃOKP
ꢀ.#/2ꢀ6+/'ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢃJ
ꢀ(+.6'4ꢀ6+/'ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢃJ
ꢀ/;ꢀ$76610
ꢀ#7&+1
ꢀ5%4''0
ꢀ126+10
ꢀ/+7
ꢀ'#5;ꢀ/'07
ꢀ5'48+%'
ꢀ5'%74+6;
Item
Description
Using the ▲/▼ buttons turns on/off the automatic signal search function.
TURN ON TURN OFF
ó
When the TURN ON is selected, detecting no signal automatically cycles
through input ports in the following order. The search is started from the
current port. Then when an input is found, the projector will stop searching
and display the image.
AUTO SEARCH
RGB ꢀ RGB ꢁ Mꢀ-D MIU COMPONENT S-VIDEO VIDEO
ð ð
ð
ð
ð
ð
• The MIU input is skipped, as long as no image is sent from PC on
the “Live Mode” ( 54).
Using the ▲/▼ buttons turns on/off the automatic keystone function.
TURN ON
TURN OFF
ó
TURN ON : Automatic keystone distortion correction will be
executed whenever changing the slant of the projector.
TURN OFF : This function is disabled. Please execute the AUTO
AUTO
KEYSTONE
KEYSTONE
EXECUTE in the SETUP Menu for automatic
keystone distortion correction.
• When the projector is suspended from the ceiling this feature will
not function properly so select the TURN OFF.
• This function will be unavailable when the Transition Detector is
on
(
52).
Using the ▲/▼ buttons turns on/off the AUTO ON function.
TURN ON TURN OFF
ó
When AUTO ON is set to TURN ON, the projector’s lamp will only
be automatically turned on when the Power switch is turned on if
the power was turned off using the Power switch the last time the
projector was turned off.
AUTO ON
• After turning the lamp on by the AUTO ON function, if neither input nor
operation is detected for about 30 minutes, the projector is turned off, even
though the AUTO OFF function
(
44) is disabled.
(continued on next page)
43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPTION Menu
OPTION Menu (continued)
Item
Description
Using the ▲/▼ buttons adjusts the time to count down to
automatically turn the projector off.
Long (max. 99 minutes)
Short (min. 0 minute = DISABLE)
ó
AUTO OFF
AUTO OFF
ENABLE
DISABLE
ꢀ
0
When the time is set to 0, the projector is not turned off automatically.
When the time is set to ꢀ to 99, and when the passed time with no-
signal or an unsuitable signal reaches at the set time, the projector
lamp will be turned off.
AUTO OFF
If one of the projector's buttons or the remote control buttons
is pressed or one of the commands (except get commands) is
transmitted to the control port during the corresponding time,
projector will not be turned off.
Please refer to the section “Turning off the power” ( 17).
The lamp time is the time counted after the last resetting. It is
shown in the OPTION menu as the usage time of the lamp.
Pressing the RESET button on the remote control or the ► button
of the projector displays a dialog.
To reset the lamp time, select the RESET using the ▲ button.
LAMP TIME
RESET CANCEL
• Please reset the lamp time only when you have replaced the lamp,
for a suitable indication about the lamp.
• For the lamp replacement, see the section "Lamp" ( 59, 60).
The filter time is the time counted after the last resetting. It is shown
in the OPTION menu as the usage time of the air filter.
Pressing the RESET button on the remote control or the ► button
of the projector displays a dialog.
To reset the filter time, select the RESET using the ▲ button.
FILTER TIME
RESET CANCEL
•
Please reset the filter time only when you have cleaned or replaced
the air filter, for a suitable indication about the air filter.
• For the air filter cleaning, see the section "Air filter" ( 61, 62).
(continued on next page)
44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPTION Menu
OPTION Menu (continued)
Item
Description
This item is to assign one of the following function to MY BUTTON
ꢀ and ꢁ on the remote control ( 6).
Choose 1 or 2 on the MY BUTTON menu using the ◄/► button
first. Then using the ▲/▼ buttons sets one of the following functions
to the chosen button.
• RGBꢀ: Sets port to RGBꢀ.
• RGBꢁ: Sets port to RGBꢁ.
• Mꢀ-D: Sets port to Mꢀ-D.
• MIU: Sets port to MIU.
• COMPONENT: Sets port to COMPONENT (Y, Cb/Pb, Cr/Pr).
• S-VIDEO: Sets port to S-VIDEO.
• VIDEO: Sets port to VIDEO.
• e-SHOT: Displays the e-SHOT menu ( 55).
•
INFORMATION: Displays a dialog of INPUT INFORMATION
(
58).
• AUTO KEYSTONE
EXECUTE:
Performs automatic keystone distortion correction ( 36).
MY BUTTON
• MY MEMORY:
Loads one of adjustment data stored ( 29).
•
When the current adjustment is not saved to memory a dialog is displayed.
6GORQTCT[ꢀEQPFKVKQP
ꢀ/'/14;ꢀꢁꢀ4GECNNꢀUCXGFꢀRCTCOGVGTU
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢁꢀ3WKV
0QꢀUCXGFꢀFCVC
If you want to keep the current adjustment, please press the ◄
button to quit. Otherwise the current adjusted condition will be lost
by loading a data.
• PICTURE MODE: Changes the PICTURE MODE ( 25).
• FILTER RESET:
Displays the filter time reset confirmation dialogue ( 44).
• ACTIVE IRIS: Changes the active iris mode.
• VOLUME+: Set the volume up.
• VOLUME-: Set the volume down.
Selecting this item displays the SERVICE menu.
Select an item using the ▲/▼ buttons, and press the ► button or
the ENTER button on the remote control to execute the item.
FAN SPEED
AUTO ADJUST
GHOST
ó ó
FILTER MESSAGE
LENS TYPE
KEY LOCK
ó
ó
ó
FACTORY RESET
INFORMATION
REMOTE FREQ.
REMOTE RECEIV.
ó
ó
ó
SERVICE
FAN SPEED
Using the ▲/▼ buttons switches the rotation speed
of the cooling fans. The HIGH is the mode for use at
highlands etc. Note that the projector is noisier when
the HIGH is selected.
(#052''&
*+)*
014/#.
HIGH
NORMAL
ó
(continued on next page)
45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPTION Menu
OPTION Menu (continued)
Item
Description
AUTO ADJUST
Using the ▲/▼ buttons enables/disables the
automatic adjustment.When DISABLE is selected,
the automatic adjustment feature is disabled,
although rough adjustment is automatically performed
depending on the basic setting.
#761ꢀ#&,756
'0#$.'
&+5#$.'
ENABLE
DISABLE
ó
• Depending on conditions, such as input image, signal cable to
the projector, environment around the projector, etc., the automatic
adjustment may not work correctly. In such a case, please
choose DISABLE to disable the automatic adjustment, and make
adjustment manually.
GHOST
4
)
$
1. Select a color element of ghost using the ◄/►
buttons.
ꢀꢁ ꢀꢁ ꢀꢁ
)*156
ꢁ. Adjust the selected element using the ▲/▼ buttons to
disappear ghost.
FILTER MESSAGE
Use the ▲/▼ button to set the timer for the interval to
show the message for cleaning up the air filter.
(+.6'4ꢀ/'55#)'
ꢃꢂJ
ꢁꢂꢂJ
50h
ꢀ00h TURN OFF
ꢁ00h
300h
ó ó ó ó
ꢄꢂꢂJ
ꢅꢂꢂJ
After selecting “50h”, “ꢀ00h”, “ꢁ00h”, or “300h”, the
message “REMINDER HRS PASSED AFTER THE
6740ꢀ1((
***
SERVICE
(continued)
LAST FILTER CHECK” will appear after the timer
reaches the interval time set by the menu.
(
63) When the “TURN OFF” is chosen, the air filter
cleaning message will not appear.
• Please check and clean the air filter periodically, even if there is no
message. If the air filter becomes to be blocked by dust or others,
the internal temperature will rise, which could cause malfunction, or
reduce the lifetime of the projector.
• It is recommended to choose “ꢀ00h” in general. Please be careful
with the operating environment of the projector and the condition of
the air filter, especially when the “200h”, “300h” or “TURN OFF” is
chosen.
LENS TYPE
Select the lens type currently used using the ▲/▼
.'05ꢀ6;2'
ꢂ
buttons.
ꢁ
ꢀ
ꢁ
3
4
5
ó ó ó ó
ꢃ
ꢄ
ꢅ
Please select one of them referring to the following.
ꢀ: for a standard lens (Type NL-600)
2: for a fixed short throw lens (Type FL-601)
3: for a short throw lens (Type SL-60ꢁ)
4: for a long throw lens (Type LL-603)
5: for an ultra long throw lens (Type UL-604)
• This setting has an influence on the keystone distortion etc.
• About the optional lens, ask you dealer.
(continued on next page)
46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPTION Menu
OPTION Menu (continued)
Item
Description
KEY LOCK
Using the ▲/▼ buttons turns on/off the key lock feature. When
TURN ON is selected, the buttons on the projector except the
STANDBY/ON button are locked.
TURN ON
TURN OFF
ó
• Please use to avoid a mischief and touching accidentally. This
function does not have any effect on the remote control.
REMOTE RECEIV.
(1) Select a remote sensor using the ▲/▼ button.
ꢀ:FRONT
ꢁ:TOP
3:REAR
ó
ó
㪜㪥㪫㪜㪩
ꢀꢀꢅꢀꢆ
(ꢁ) Switch it using the ENTER button
4'/16'ꢀ4'%'+8ꢄ
(off) (on)
¨ óþ
ꢀꢁꢂ(4106
ꢀꢃꢂ612
ꢀꢇꢂ4'#4
• A sensor cannot be turned off when the other
two are off. Always at least one sensor is on.
REMOTE FREQ.
Use the ▲/▼ button to change the Projector's remote sensor
setting ( 15).
ꢀ:NORMAL
ꢁ:HIGH
ó
Items with a checkmark are on. The factory
default setting is for both ꢀ:NORMAL and ꢁ:
HIGH to be on. If the remote control does not
function correctly set the this to either only
ꢀ or only ꢁ as described in Remote Control
㪜㪥㪫㪜㪩
ꢀꢀꢅꢀꢆ
4'/16'ꢀ(4'3ꢁ
ꢀꢂꢃ014/#.
ꢀꢄꢃ*+)*
SERVICE
(continued)
Settings ( 15).
Neither can be turned off at the same time.
INFORMATION
Selecting this item displays a dialog titled “INPUT INFORMATION”.
It shows the information about the current input.
INPUT-INFORMATION
RGBꢀ
ꢀ0ꢁ4x768 @60Hz
FRAME LOCK
INPUT-INFORMATION
S-VIDEO
INPUT-INFORMATION
COMPONENT
576i @50
SECAM
AUTO
SCART RGB
• The “FRAME LOCK” message on the dialog means the frame lock
function is working.
• The “SCART RGB” message means the COMPONENT VIDEO
port is working as a SCART RGB input port. Please refer to the
COMPONENT item in INPUT menu ( 33).
• This item can't be selected for no signal and sync out.
FACTORY RESET
Selecting RESET using the button ▲ performs this function. By
this function, all the items in all of menus will collectively return to
the initial setting. Note that the items LAMP TIME, FILTER TIME,
LANGUAGE and SECURITY are not reset.
RESET CANCEL
(continued on next page)
47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPTION Menu
OPTION Menu (continued)
Item
Description
This projector is equipped with security functions.
User registration is required before using the security functions.
Please contact your local dealer.
1. Using Security Features
1.1 Inputting the PASSWORD
1.1-1 Use the ▲/▼ buttons on the OPTION
menu to select SECURITY and press the ►
button. The ENTER PASSWORD box will be
displayed. The factory default PASSWORD is
2400. This PASSWORD can be changed (ꢀ.ꢁ
5'%74+6;
'06'4ꢀ2#55914&
Changing the PASSWORD).
ꢁꢀꢀꢁꢀꢀꢁꢀꢀꢁ
• It is strongly recommended the factory default
PASSWORD to be changed as soon as possible.
37+6
0':6
ENTER PASSWORD
BOX
1.1-2 Use the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons to enter the
registered PASSWORD. Move the cursor to
the right side of the ENTER PASSWORD
BOX and press the ► button to display the
SECURITY menu. If an incorrect PASSWORD
is input the ENTER PASSWORD BOX will
be displayed again. If incorrect PASSWORD
is input 3 times the projector will turn off.
Afterwards the projector will turn off every time
an incorrect PASSWORD is input.
ꢀ5'%74+6;
5'%74+6;ꢀ2#55914&ꢀ%*#0)'
/[5ETGGPꢀ2#55914&ꢀ6740ꢀ1((
2+0ꢀ.1%-ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ6740ꢀ1((
64#05+6+10ꢀ&'6'%614ꢀ6740ꢀ1((
ꢀꢀꢀ
ꢀ
SECURITY MENU
SECURITY
5'%74+6;
'06'4ꢀ0'9ꢀ2#55914&
1.2 Changing the PASSWORD
1.2-1 Use the ▲/▼ buttons on the SECURITY menu
to select SECURITY PASSWORD CHANGE
and press the ► button to display the ENTER
NEW PASSWORD BOX.
ꢁꢀꢀꢁꢀꢀꢁꢀꢀꢁ
37+6
0':6
ENTER NEW PASSWORD
BOX
1.2-2 Use the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons to enter the new
PASSWORD.
5'%74+6;
0'9ꢀ2#55914&ꢀ#)#+0
ꢀ.ꢁ-3 Move the cursor to the right side of the
ENTER NEW PASSWORD BOX and press
the ► button to display the NEW PASSWORD
AGAIN BOX, enter the same PASSWORD
again.
ꢁꢀꢀꢁꢀꢀꢁꢀꢀꢁ
%#0%'.
1-
NEW PASSWORD
AGAIN BOX
ꢀ.ꢁ-4 Move the cursor to the right side of the NEW
PASSWORD AGAIN BOX and press the ►
button and the NOTE NEW PASSWORD BOX
will be displayed for about ꢁ0 seconds, please
make note of the PASSWORD during this time.
Pressing the ENTER button on the remote
controll or INPUT button on the projector will
close the NOTE NEW PASSWORD BOX.
• Please do not forget your PASSWORD.
5'%74+6;
016'ꢀ0'9ꢀ2#55914&
ꢂꢀꢀꢂꢀꢀꢂꢀꢀꢂ
'06'4ꢀꢃ ꢁ':+6
NOTE NEW
PASSWORD BOX
(continued on next page)
48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPTION Menu
OPTION Menu (continued)
Item
Description
1.3 If you have forgotten your PASSWORD
ꢀ.3-ꢀ Follow the procedure in ꢀ.ꢀ-ꢀ to display the
ENTER PASSWORD BOX.
ꢀ.3-ꢁ While the ENTER PASSWORD BOX is
displayed, press and hold the RESET button
on the remote control for about 3 seconds or
press and hold the INPUT and ► buttons on
the projector for about 3 seconds.
The ꢀ0 digit Inquiring Code will be displayed.
• If there is no key input for about 55 seconds while
the Inquiring Code is displayed the menu will close.
If necessary repeat the process from ꢀ.3-ꢀ.
ꢀ5'%74+6;ꢀ2#55914&
+PSWKTKPIꢀ%QFG
ꢀꢀꢀ
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢁꢀꢁꢀꢀꢁꢀꢁꢀꢁꢀꢁꢀꢀꢁꢀꢁꢀꢁꢀꢁ
ꢀ
Inquiring Code
(PASSWORD)
ꢀ.3-3 Contact your dealer with the ꢀ0 digit Inquiring Code. Your PASSWORD
will be sent after your user registration information is confirmed.
2. Using the MyScreen PASSWORD Function
The MyScreen PASSWORD function can be used to prohibit access to the
MyScreen function and prevent the currently registered MyScreen image
from being overwritten.
SECURITY
(continued)
2.1 Turning on the MyScreen
Function
2.1-1 Use the ▲/▼ buttons on the SECURITY
menu to select MyScreen PASSWORD and
press the ► button to display the MyScreen
PASSWORD on/off menu.
PASSWORD
/[5ETGGPꢀ2#55914&
6740ꢀ10
6740ꢀ1((
MyScreen PASSWORD
on/off menu
2.2 Setting the PASSWORD
ꢁ.ꢁ-ꢀ Display the MyScreen on/off menu using the
procedure in ꢁ.ꢀ-ꢀ.
/[5ETGGP
'06'4ꢀ2#55914&
2.2-2 Use the ▲/▼ buttons on the MyScreen
PASSWORD on/off menu to select TURN ON.
The ENTER PASSWORD BOX (small) will be
displayed.
ꢁꢀꢀꢁꢀꢀꢁꢀꢀꢁ
37+6
0':6
ENTER PASSWORD
BOX (small)
2.2-3 Use the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons to enter the
PASSWORD. Move the cursor to the right
side of the ENTER PASSWORD BOX
(small) and press the ► button to display the
CHECK PASSWORD BOX, enter the same
PASSWORD again.
/[5ETGGP
%*'%-ꢀ2#55914&
ꢁꢀꢀꢁꢀꢀꢁꢀꢀꢁ
37+6
0':6
CHECK PASSWORD
BOX
(continued on next page)
49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPTION Menu
OPTION Menu (continued)
Item
Description
ꢁ.ꢁ-4 Move the cursor to the right side of the
CHECK PASSWORD BOX and press the
► button to display the PASSWORD for
about ꢁ0 seconds, please make note of the
PASSWORD during this time.
/[5ETGGP
%1/2.'6'
ꢁꢂꢂꢁꢂꢂꢁꢂꢂꢁ
'06'4ꢂꢃ ꢀ':+6
Pressing the ENTER button on the remote control
or INPUT button on the projector will return to
MyScreen PASS WORD on/off menu.
PASSWORD BOX
When a PASSWORD is set for MyScreen:
The MyScreen registration function (and menu) will be unavailable.
The MyScreen Lock function (and menu) will be unavailable.
The START UP setting will be locked on MyScreen (and the menu will be
•
•
•
unavailable).
Turning the MyScreen PASSWORD off will allow normal operation of both
functions.
Please do not forget your MyScreen PASSWORD.
•
2.3 Turning the PASSWORD off
ꢁ.3-ꢀ Follow the procedure in ꢁ.ꢀ-ꢀ to display the MyScreen PASSWORD
on/off menu.
ꢁ.3-ꢁ Select TURN OFF to display the ENTER PASSWORD BOX (large).
Enter the registered PASSWORD and the screen will return to the
MyScreen on/off menu.
If an incorrect PASSWORD is input the menu will close. If necessary repeat
the process from ꢁ.3-ꢀ.
SECURITY
(continued)
2.4 If you have forgotten your PASSWORD
ꢁ.4-ꢀ Follow the procedure in ꢁ.ꢀ-ꢀ to display the MyScreen PASSWORD
on/off menu.
/[5ETGGP
'06'4ꢀ2#55914&
ꢁ.4-ꢁ Select TURN OFF to display the ENTER
+PSWKTKPIꢀ%QFG
ꢀꢀꢁꢂꢃꢄꢅꢆꢇꢈꢉꢊ
PASSWORD BOX (large). The ꢀ0 digit
Inquiring Code will be displayed inside the
BOX.
ꢁꢀꢀꢁꢀꢀꢁꢀꢀꢁ
37+6
0':6
ENTER PASSWORD BOX
(large)
ꢁ.4-3 Contact your dealer with the ꢀ0 digit Inquiring
Code. Your PASSWORD will be sent after
your user registration information is confirmed.
3. Using the PIN LOCK Function
PIN LOCK is a function which prevents the projector from being used unless
a registered Code is input.
3.1 Registering the PIN Code
3.1-1 Use the ▲/▼ buttons on the SECURITY menu
2+0ꢀ.1%-
to select PIN LOCK and press the ► button
or the ENTER button to display the PIN LOCK
6740ꢀ10
6740ꢀ1((
on/off menu.
PIN LOCK on/off
menu
3.1-2 Use the ▲/▼ buttons on the PIN LOCK on/off
menu to select TURN ON and the PIN BOX
will be displayed.
(continued on next page)
50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPTION Menu
OPTION Menu (continued)
Item
Description
3.1-3 Input a 4 part PIN Code using the ▲/▼/◄/►
/RGB and INPUT buttons.
A CONFIRMATION BOX will appear. Reenter the
same PIN Code. This will complete the PIN Code
registration.
ꢀ2+0ꢀ$1:
+PRWVꢀ2+0ꢀ%QFG
ꢀꢀꢀ
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢃꢀꢃꢀꢃꢀꢃ
ꢀ
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢁꢀꢀꢀꢀꢁꢀꢀꢀꢀꢁꢀꢀꢀꢀꢁꢀ4)$ꢀꢂꢀ
PIN BOX
If there is no key input for about 55 seconds while
•
the PIN BOX or the CONFIRMATION BOX are
displayed the menu will close. If necessary repeat
the process from 3.ꢀ-ꢀ.
ꢀ2+0ꢀ$1:
%QPHKTOCVKQP
ꢀꢀꢀ
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢃꢀꢃꢀꢃꢀꢃ
ꢀ
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢁꢀꢀꢀꢀꢁꢀꢀꢀꢀꢁꢀꢀꢀꢀꢁꢀ4)$ꢀꢂꢀ
Afterwards, anytime the projector is restarted after
the power switch is turned off the PIN BOX will be
displayed. Enter the registered PIN Code.
The projector can be used after entering the
registered PIN Code. If an incorrect PIN Code is
input the PIN BOX will be displayed again.
CONFIRMATION BOX
(PIN BOX)
If an incorrect PIN Code is input 3 times the projector will turn off. Afterwards
the projector will turn off every time an incorrect PIN Code is input. The
projector will also turn off if there is no key input for about 5 minutes while
the PIN BOX is displayed.
This function will activate only when the projector is started after the power
switch was turned off.
SECURITY
(continued)
Please do not forget your PIN Code.
•
3.2 Turning Off the PIN LOCK Function
3.ꢁ-ꢀ Follow the procedure in 3.ꢀ-ꢀ to display the PIN LOCK on/off menu.
Use the ▲/▼ buttons to select TURN OFF and the PIN BOX will be
displayed.
Enter the registered PIN Code to turn the PIN LOCK function off.
If an incorrect PASSWORD is entered the menu will close.
3.3 If you have forgotten your PIN Code
3.3-ꢀ While the PIN BOX is displayed, press and
ꢀ2+0ꢀ$1:
hold the RESET button for three seconds or
press and hold the INPUT and ► buttons for
three seconds. The ꢀ0 digit Inquiring Code will
be displayed.
+PSWKTKPIꢀ%QFG
ꢀꢀꢀ
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢁꢀꢁꢀꢀꢁꢀꢁꢀꢁꢀꢁꢀꢀꢁꢀꢁꢀꢁꢀꢁ
ꢀ
Inquiring Code
(PIN Code)
If there is no key input for about 5 minutes while
the Inquiring Code is displayed the projector will turn
off.
•
3.3-ꢁ Contact your dealer with the ꢀ0 digit Inquiring Code. Your PASSWORD
will be sent after your user registration information is confirmed.
(continued on next page)
5ꢀ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPTION Menu
OPTION Menu (continued)
Item
Description
4. Using the Transition Detector Function
While the Transition Detector function is ON, when power switch is started to
supply to the projector, it might react as below.
• Transition Detector alarm shown below might appear on screen, if the
projector has been moved or re-installed.
• Transition Detector alarm might appear on screen, if the MIRROR setting
has been changed.
• Keystone adjustment feature has been prohibited as long as the Transition
Detector function is ON.
4.1 Turning On the
Function
Transition Detector
4.ꢀ-ꢀ Use the ▲/▼ buttons on the SECURITY menu to
select Transition Detector and press the ► or the
ENTER button to display the Transition Detector
on/off menu. Select TURN ON and the current
angle and mirror setting will be recorded.
64#05+6+10ꢀ&'6'%614
6740ꢀ10
6740ꢀ1((
Transition Detector
on/off menu
•
This feature may not function properly if the projector is
not in a stable position when TURN ON is selected.
ꢁꢁ64#05+6+10ꢀ&'6'%614ꢀ10
4.ꢀ-ꢁ If this function is set to TURN ON when the
vertical angle of the projector or mirror setting
at which the projector is turned on is different
than the previously recorded the Transition
Detector Alarm will be displayed and the
projector will not display the input signal.
6JGꢀRTQLGEVQTꢀJCUꢀDGGPꢀVTCPUHGTTGF
HTQOꢀRTGXKQWUN[ꢀKPUVCNNGFꢀRQUKVKQPꢂ
ꢀꢀꢀ
ꢀ2+0ꢀ$1:
ꢀ
+Hꢀ[QWꢀYKUJꢀVQꢀJCXGꢀCꢀUSWCTGꢀKOCIG
QPꢀUETGGPꢀCICKPꢃ
FKUCDNGꢀ6TCPUKVKQPꢀ&GVGEVQTꢀQPꢀ/GPWꢂ
Transition Detector Alarm
Set the Transition Detector off I the SECURITY menu to display the input signal.
If the Transition Detector ALARM is displayed for about 5 minutes the lamp will turn off.
This function will activate only when the projector is started after the power
switch was turned off.
SECURITY
(continued)
4.2 Setting the
PASSWORD
Transition Detector
4.2-1 Use the ▲/▼ buttons on the SECURITY menu to select Transition
Detector and press the ► or the ENTER button to display the
Transition Detector on/off menu.
4.2-2 Use the ▲/▼ buttons on the Transition
64#05+6+10ꢀ&'6'%614
'06'4ꢀ2#55914&
Detector on/off menu to select TURN ON.
The ENTER PASSWORD BOX (small) will be
ꢁꢀꢀꢁꢀꢀꢁꢀꢀꢁ
displayed.
37+6
0':6
ENTER PASSWORD
BOX (small)
4.ꢁ-3 Use the
▲
/
▼
/
◄
/
►
buttons to enter a
PASSWORD. Move the cursor to the right side of
the ENTER PASSWORD BOX (small) and press
64#05+6+10ꢀ&'6'%614
%*'%-ꢀ2#55914&
the
►
button to display the CHECK PASSWORD
ꢁꢀꢀꢁꢀꢀꢁꢀꢀꢁ
BOX, enter the same PASSWORD again.
37+6
0':6
4.ꢁ-4 Move the cursor to the right side of the
CHECK PASSWORD BOX and press the
► button to display the PASSWORD for
about ꢁ0 seconds, please make note of the
PASSWORD during this time.
CHECK PASSWORD
BOX
64#05+6+10ꢀ&'6'%614
%1/2.'6'
ꢂꢀꢀꢂꢀꢀꢂꢀꢀꢂ
Pressing the ENTER button on the remote control or
the INPUT button on the projector will return to the
Transition Detector on/off menu.
'06'4ꢀꢃ ꢁ':+6
PASSWORD BOX
• Please do not forget your Transition Detector PASSWORD.
(continued on next page)
5ꢁ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPTION Menu
OPTION Menu (continued)
Item
Description
4.3 Setting the Transition Detector off
4.3-ꢀ Follow the procedure in 4.ꢀ-ꢀ to display the Transition Detector on/off
menu.
4.3-ꢁ Select TURN OFF to display the ENTER PASSWORD BOX (large).
Enter the registered PASSWORD and the screen will return to the
Transition Detector on/off menu.
If an incorrect PASSWORD is input the menu will close. If necessary repeat
the process from 4.3-ꢀ.
SECURITY
(continued)
4.4 If you have forgotten your PASSWORD
4.4-ꢀ Follow the procedure in 4.ꢀ-ꢀ to display the Transition Detector on/off
menu.
64#05+6+10ꢀ&'6'%614
4.4-ꢁ Select TURN OFF to display the ENTER
'06'4ꢀ2#55914&
PASSWORD BOX (large). The ꢀ0 digit
Inquiring Code will be displayed inside the
BOX.
+PSWKTKPIꢀ%QFG
ꢀꢀꢁꢂꢃꢄꢅꢆꢇꢈꢉꢊ
ꢁꢀꢀꢁꢀꢀꢁꢀꢀꢁ
0':6
37+6
ENTER PASSWORD BOX
(large)
4.4-3 Contact your dealer with the ꢀ0 digit Inquiring
Code. Your PASSWORD will be sent after your
user registration information is confirmed.
53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MIU Menu
MIU Menu
ꢀ/'07ꢀ=4)$ꢁ?
ꢀꢀꢂ5'.'%6
Consult with your network administrator before connecting
to an existing access point on your network. Incorrect
network settings on this projector may cause trouble on the
network.
Select “MIU” from the main menu to access the following
functions.
ꢀ2+%674'
ꢀ+/#)'
ꢀ+0276
.+8'ꢀ/1&'
2%ꢃ.'55ꢀ24'5'06#6+10
5'672
Gꢃ5*16
+0(14/#6+10
5'48+%'
ꢀ5'672
ꢀ#7&+1
ꢀ5%4''0
ꢀ126+10
ꢀ/+7
ꢀ
ꢀ'#5;ꢀ/'07
Select an item using the ▲/▼ cursor buttons on the
projector or remote control, and press the ► cursor button
on the projector or remote control, or ENTER button on
the remote control to execute the item. Then perform it
according to the following table.
See the User’s Manual - Network Functions for details of
MIU operation. Last section of this manual.
NOTE • The factory default setting for DHCP is TURN OFF. If your network
has DHCP enabled, and needs to set IP ADDRESS, SUBNET MASK and
DEFAULT GATEWAY automatically, please set DHCP to TURN ON. ( 2.5.2
Network Settings of the User’s Manual - Network Functions)
• If you are not utilizing SNTP ( 2.5.7 Date/Time Settings of the User’s
Manual - Network Functions), then you must set the DATE AND TIME ( 56)
during the initial installation.
Item
Description
Selecting this item sets the projector onto the “Live Mode”.
On the “Live Mode”, the projector displays the images from the PC
LIVE MODE
via Network, supported by “MIU Live Viewer”. (
1.1 Live Mode of
the User’s Manual - Network Functions, last section of this manual).
Selecting this item displays the PC-LESS PRESENTATION menu.
2%ꢀ.'55ꢁ24'5'06#6+10
ꢁ6*7/$0#+.
ꢁ5.+&'ꢁ5*19
ꢁ&+4'%64;
ꢁ&+52.#;ꢁ5+<'
ꢁ-';ꢁ%10(+)ꢂ
Using the menu is able to make the projector
display the images stored in SD card or USB
PC-LESS
PRESENTATION memory, and realizes a presentation without PC.
1.2 PC-LESS Presentation of the User’s
(
Manual - Network Functions)
(continued on next page)
54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MIU Menu
MIU Menu (continued)
Item
Operation
Selecting this item displays the e-SHOT menu.
Gꢀ5*16ꢁ
Use the ▲/▼ buttons to select an item which
+/#)'ꢀꢁꢁꢄꢁ &'/10564#6+10ꢀꢃꢄ
+/#)'ꢀꢁꢁꢂꢁ 24'5'06#6+10(+.'
is a still image by the e-SHOT ( 4.7 e-SHOT
&'/10564#6+10ꢀꢃꢅ
6#$.'
+/#)'ꢀꢁꢁꢅꢁ
+/#)'ꢀꢁꢁꢆꢁ
(Still Image Transfer) Display of the User’s
Manual - Network Functions) and the ► or
ENTER button to display the image.
• Insert the SD memory card or USB memory into the projector
before you use the e-SHOT function. ( 12)
• The item without image stored cannot be selected.
• The image names are each displayed in ꢀ6 characters or less.
•
Japanese file name is displayed correctly only when the projector’s
language is set to Japanese. And the characters other than alphanumeric
character are not displayed correctly in Japanese mode. (Ç, ä, etc.)
To switch the image displayed
Use the ▲/▼ buttons.
e-SHOT
To return to the menu
Press the ◄ or ESC button on the remote control.
To erase the image displayed and its source file in the SD card
or USB memory
(ꢀ) Press the RESET button on the
remote control while displaying
an image to display the e-SHOT -
RESET menu.
ꢀGꢀꢁꢀ5*16ꢀ
ꢀꢀ4'5'6ꢀꢂꢀꢀꢀ+/#)'ꢁꢀꢀꢃꢀ
ꢀꢄꢀꢅꢀꢂꢀ01ꢀꢀꢀꢄꢀꢀꢀꢂꢀ;'5ꢀ
'5%ꢀ '06'4ꢀ
(ꢁ) Press the ENTER button on the remote control or the INPUT
button on the projector to perform to erase.
To stop erasing, press the ◄ button and INPUT button on the
projector.
ꢀ/+7ꢀ5'672
Selecting this item displays the MIU SETUP menu.
ꢀ&*%2ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ10
Use the ▲/▼ buttons to select an item, and the ►
ꢀ+2ꢀ#&&4'55
ꢀ57$0'6ꢀ/#5-
or ENTER button on the remote control to perform
ꢀ&'(#7.6ꢀ)#6'9#;
the item.
ꢀ6+/'ꢀ&+(('4'0%'
ꢀ'ꢀ#0&ꢀ6+/'
ꢀ/1&'
ꢀ%*
SETUP
ꢀ'0%4;26+10
ꢀ52''&
DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol)
ꢀ0'6914-ꢀ/1&'
Use the ▲/▼ buttons to turn DHCP on/off.
TURN ON
TURN OFF
ó
&*%2ꢀ
6740ꢀ10ꢀ
6740ꢀ1((ꢀ
• Select TURN OFF when the network does not have
DHCP enabled.
(continued on next page)
55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MIU Menu
MIU Menu (continued)
Item
Description
IP ADDRESS
Use the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons to enter the IP
ADDRESS. This function can only be used
when DHCP is set to TURN OFF.
ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢄꢃꢀꢅꢆꢃꢄꢃꢀꢃꢄꢃ ꢂꢇꢈ
+2ꢃ#&&4'55ꢃ
• The IP ADDRESS is the number that identifies this projector on the
network. You cannot have two devices with the same IP ADDRESS
on the same network.
SUBNET MASK
Use the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons to enter the
same SUBNET MASK used by your PC. This
function can only be used when DHCP is set
255. 255.255. 0
SUBNET MASK
to TURN OFF.
DEFAULT GATEWAY
Use the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons to enter the
0. 0. 0.
0
DEFAULT GATEWAY (a node on a computer
network that serves as an access point to
another network) address.
DEFAULT GATEWAY
SETUP
(continued)
This function can only be used when DHCP is
set to TURN OFF.
TIME DIFFERENCE
6+/'ꢀ&+(('4'0%'ꢀ
Use the ▲/▼ buttons to enter the
TIME DIFFERENCE.
Set the same TIME DIFFERENCE
as the one set on your PC. If unsure,
consult your network administrator.
Use the ◄ button to return to the menu
after setting the TIME DIFFERENCE.
㪞㪤㪫㩷㪇㪇㪑㪇㪇
DATE AND TIME
Use the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons to enter the
Year (last two digits), Month, Date, Hour and
Minute.
ꢀꢁꢁꢁꢂꢃꢄꢂꢃꢃꢄꢃꢃꢁꢃꢅꢃꢁ
'ꢃ#0&ꢃ6+/'
• The projector will override this setting and
retrieve DATE AND TIME information from the
Timeserver when SNTP is enabled. ( 2.5.7
Date/Time Settings of the User’s Manual -
Network Functions)
(continued on next page)
56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MIU Menu
MIU Menu (continued)
Item
Description
MODE
/1&'
Use the ▲/▼ buttons to select the mode of
the network communication system. Select it
according to the setting of your PC.
#&*1%
+0(4#5647%674'
ADHOC
INFRASTRUCTURE
ó
CH
Use the ▲/▼ buttons to select the channel
of the wireless LAN while using it. Select it
according to the setting of your PC.
%*
ꢀꢀ
The channels ꢀ to ꢀꢀ are available.
• The available channels would be various depending on a country.
In addition, wireless LAN card might be required due to the
standard.
ENCRYPTION
'0%4;26+10
Use the ▲/▼ buttons to select the encryption
ꢀ92#ꢅꢁ25-ꢂ#'5ꢃ
ꢀ92#ꢁ25-ꢂ#'5ꢃ
method to be used.
92#ꢁ25-ꢂ6-+2ꢃ
9'2ꢀꢄꢅꢆꢀDKV
9'2ꢀꢀꢇꢈꢀDKV
1((
WPAꢁ-PSK(AES)
SETUP
(continued)
ô
WPA-PSK(AES)
WPA-PSK(TKIP)
WEP ꢀꢁ8bit
WEP 64bit
OFF
ó
ó
ó
ó
SPEED
Use the ▲/▼ buttons to select the transfer rate.
52''&
#761
ꢀꢁꢂ/
ꢁꢇꢂ/
ꢄꢅꢂ/
ꢃꢁꢂ/
ꢆꢇꢂ/
ꢆꢃꢂ/
ꢆꢆꢂ/
ꢂꢈꢂ/
ꢂꢅꢂ/
ꢀꢉꢀ/
ꢂꢃꢂ/
ꢂꢆꢂ/
(M : Mbps : Megabits per second)
AUTO 54M 48M 36M ꢁ4M ꢀ8M
ó ó ó ó ó
ô
ô
ꢀM ꢁM 5.5M 6M 9M ꢀꢀM ꢀꢁM
ó ó ó ó ó ó
• The AUTO mode automatically selects the
optimum rate.
• Transfer rates may change due to the network
situation.
0'6914-ꢀ/1&'
NETWORK MODE
Use the ▲/▼ buttons to select the network mode.
9+4'.'55
9+4'&
WIRELESS
WIRED
ó
• The network mode will be initialized whenever the power is turned
on with the power switch.
• The WIRELESS will be enabled when the wireless network card is
installed.
• The WIRED will be enabled when the wireless network card is not
installed.
(continued on next page)
57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MIU Menu
MIU Menu (continued)
Item
Description
Selecting this item displays the MIU-INFORMATION dialog for confirming
the network setting.
/+7ꢊ+0(14/#6+10
0#/'ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢋꢋꢋꢋꢋꢋꢋꢋꢋꢋꢋꢋꢋꢋꢋꢋꢅꢀꢅꢅ
+2ꢀ#&&4'55ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢁꢄꢂꢅꢁꢆꢃꢅꢁꢅꢂꢇꢈ
57$0'6/#5-ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢂꢇꢇꢅꢂꢇꢇꢅꢂꢇꢇꢅꢉ
&'(#7.6ꢀ)#6'9#;ꢀꢀꢉꢅꢉꢅꢉꢅꢉ
6+/'ꢀ&+(('4'0%'ꢀꢀ)/6ꢀꢉꢉꢍꢉꢉ
'ꢀ#0&ꢀ6+/'ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢂꢉꢉꢉꢌꢁꢌꢁꢀꢀꢉꢍꢉ
/1&'ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ#&*1%
0'6914-ꢀ/1&'ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ9+4'.'55
12'4#6+10ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ.+8'
75$ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ/'/14;
5&ꢀ%#4&ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ9+4'.'55ꢀ.#0
52''&ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢁꢁꢀ/
55+&ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢋꢋꢋꢋꢋꢋꢋꢋꢋꢋꢋꢋꢋꢋꢋꢋ
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢋꢋꢋꢋꢋꢋꢋꢋꢋꢋꢋꢋꢋꢋꢋꢋ
/#%ꢀ'6*'40'6ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢋꢋꢊꢋꢋꢊꢋꢋꢊꢋꢋꢊꢋꢋꢊꢋꢋ
/#%ꢀ9+4'.'55ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢋꢋꢊꢋꢋꢊꢋꢋꢊꢋꢋꢊꢋꢋꢊꢋꢋ
%*ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢁꢁ
'0%4;26+10ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ9'2ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢀDKV
INFORMATION
• Only the first ꢀ6 characters of the projector name are displayed.
• Only the first 3ꢁ characters of the SSID are displayed.
• When the voltage level of the battery for the built in clock decreases, the
set time may become incorrect even though accurate date and time are
input. Replace the battery suitably. ( 63)
• MAC wireless will not be displayed when the NETWORK MODE is set to
the WIRED even if the wireless LAN SD card is mounted.
• IP ADDRESS, SUBNET MASK and DEFAULT GATEWAY indicate “0.0.0.0”
in the following condition.
(ꢀ) The NETWORK MODE is set to the WIRELESSE and the wireless LAN
SD card is not mounted.
(ꢁ) DHCP is ON and the projector does not get address from DHCP server.
Selecting this item displays the SERVICE menu.
Use the ▲/▼ buttons to select an item, and the ► or
ENTER button on the remote control to perform the
item.
SERVICE
REMOVE ALL
REMOVE SD CARD
REMOVE USB
MIU RESTART
REMOVE ALL, REMOVE SD CARD, REMOVE USB
Use the ▲ button to perform the procedure to remove
the media.
4'/18'ꢀ#..
':'%76'
%#0%'.
EXECUTE CANCEL
• Before removing the SD card or USB memory, be sure
to perform the REMOVE procedure.
MIU RESTART
SERVICE
MIU RESTART
Use the ▲ button to restart the network communication.
The network communication will be cut off once and
restarted.
EXECUTE
CANCEL
EXECUTE CANCEL
• After selecting the EXECUTE, the MIU menu may not be controlled
approximately ꢁ0 seconds.
• If DHCP is ON, IP address may be changed.
58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance
Maintenance
Lamp
A lamp has finite product life. Using the lamp for long periods of time could cause
the pictures darker or the color tone poor. Note that each lamp has a different
lifetime, and some may burst or burn out soon after you start using them.
Preparation of a new lamp and early replacement are recommended. To prepare
a new lamp, contact your dealer and tell the lamp type number.
Type number = 456-8943
The lamp cover
Replacing the lamp
Turn the projector off, and unplug the power cord.
Allow the projector to cool for at least 45 minutes.
ꢀ.
Prepare a new lamp.
If the projector is mounted on a ceiling, or if the lamp
has broken, also ask the dealer to replace the lamp.
ꢁ.
In case of replacement by yourself,
Loosen the screw (marked by arrow) of the lamp cover
and then slide the lamp cover to the side to remove it.
3.
4.
Loosen the 3 screws (marked by arrow) of the
lamp, and slowly pick up the lamp by the handles.
Insert the new lamp, and retighten firmly the
5.
3 screws of the lamp that are loosened in the
previous process to lock it in place.
Slide the lamp cover back in place and firmly
fasten the screw of the lamp cover.
The handles
6.
Turn the projector on and reset the lamp time
using the LAMP TIME item in the OPTION menu
7.
(
44)
.
(ꢀ) Press the MENU button to display a menu.
(ꢁ) Point at the “Go to Advanced Menu …” in the menu
using the ▼/▲ button, then press the ► button.
(3) Point at the “OPTION” in the left column of the
menu using the ▼/▲button, then press the ►
button.
(4) Point at the “LAMP TIME” using the ▼/▲ button, then press the ► button. A
dialog will appear.
(5) Press the ▲ button to select “RESET” on the dialog. It performs resetting the
lamp time.
NOTE • Please reset the lamp time only when you have replaced the lamp,
for a suitable indication about the lamp.
59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance
Lamp (continued)
Lamp warning
HIGH VOLTAGE
HIGH TEMPERATURE
HIGH PRESSURE
WARNING ►The projector uses a high-pressure mercury glass lamp. The
lamp can break with a loud bang, or burn out, if jolted or scratched, handled
while hot, or worn over time. Note that each lamp has a different lifetime, and
some may burst or burn out soon after you start using them. In addition, when
the bulb bursts, it is possible for shards of glass to fly into the lamp housing, and
for gas containing mercury to escape from the projector’s vent holes.
►About disposal of a lamp: This product contains a mercury lamp; do not put
it in a trash. Dispose of it in accordance with environmental laws.
• For lamp recycling, go to www.lamprecycle.org. (in the US)
• For product disposal, contact your local government agency
or www.eiae.org (in the US) or www.epsc.ca (in Canada).
For more information, call your dealer.
• If the lamp should break (it will make a loud bang when it does),
unplug the power cord from the outlet, and make sure to request a
replacement lamp from your local dealer. Note that shards of glass
could damage the projector’s internals, or cause injury during handling,
so please do not try to clean the projector or replace the lamp yourself.
• If the lamp should break (it will make a loud bang when it does),
Disconnect
the plug
from the
power
ventilate the room well, and make sure not to breathe the gas that
comes out of the projector vents, or get it in your eyes or mouth.
• Before replacing the lamp, turn the projector off and unplug the power
outlet
cord, then wait at least 45 minutes for the lamp to cool sufficiently.
Handling the lamp while hot can cause burns, as well as damaging the
lamp.
• Never unscrew except the appointed (marked by an arrow) screws.
• Do not open the lamp cover while the projector is suspended from
above. This is dangerous, since if the lamp’s bulb has broken, the
shards will fall out when the cover is opened. In addition, working in
high places is dangerous, so ask your local dealer to have the lamp
replaced even if the bulb is not broken.
• Do not use the projector with the lamp cover removed. At the lamp
replacing, make sure that the screws are screwed in firmly. Loose
screws could result in damage or injury.
• Use only the lamp of the specified type.
• If the lamp breaks soon after the first time it is used, it is possible
that there are electrical problems elsewhere besides the lamp. If this
happens, contact your local dealer or a service representative.
•
Handle with care: jolting or scratching could cause the lamp bulb to burst during use.
• Using the lamp for long periods of time, could cause it dark, not to light
up or to burst. When the pictures appear dark, or when the color tone
is poor, please replace the lamp as soon as possible. Do not use old
(used) lamps; this is a cause of breakage.
60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance
Air filter
Please check and clean the air filter periodically. If the air filter becomes clogged
by dust or the like, internal temperatures rise, which could cause a fire, a burn or
malfunction to the projector. When the indicators or a message prompts you to
clean the air filter, comply with it as soon as possible. Note that the projector may
shut down, when the projector heats too much.
Please replace the air filter when it is damaged or too soiled. Preparation of a new
air filter is recommended. To prepare a new air filter, contact with your dealer and
tell the air filter type number.
Type number = MU03642
Cleaning the air filter
The front side of the projector
Turn the projector off, and unplug the
power cord. Allow the projector to
sufficiently cool down.
ꢀ.
The filter cover
Use a vacuum cleaner on and around the
filter cover.
ꢁ.
Hold the filter cover knobs while lifting it.
The filter unit made up the filter cover and
others will come off.
3.
The filter cover knobs
The filter frame knob
Use a vacuum cleaner for the filter vent of
the projector and the filter frame side of
the filter unit.
The filter unit
4.
If the air filter is damaged or too soiled,
replace it according to the following
procedure number 5 to 7. Otherwise, please
jump to the procedure number 8.
The filter frame
To remove the filter frame, hold the filter
cover while holding and pulling the filter
frame’s knob by another hand.
5.
The air filter
Replace the air filter with new one. It is
recommended that the fluted surface of
the air filter faces the filter cover.
6.
7. Put the filter frame back.
The fluted
surface of
the air filter
8. Put the filter unit back into the projector.
The filter cover
(continued on next page)
6ꢀ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance
Air filter (continued)
Turn the projector on and reset the filter time using the FILTER TIME item in
9.
(
26)
.
the EASY MENU
(ꢀ) Press the MENU button to display a menu.
(2) Point at the “FILTER TIME” using the ▼/▲ button, then press the ► button. A
dialog will appear.
(3) Press the ▲ button to select “RESET” on the dialog. It performs resetting the
filter time.
WARNING ►Before taking care of the air filter, make sure the power
switch is off and the power cable is not plugged in, then allow the projector to
cool sufficiently. Taking care of the air filter in a high temperature state of the
projector could cause an electric shock, a burn or malfunction to the projector.
►Use only the air filter of the specified type. Do not use the projector without
the air filter or the filter cover. It could result in a fire or malfunction to the
projector.
►Clean the air filter periodically. If the air filter becomes clogged by dust or the
like, internal temperatures rise and could cause a fire, a burn or malfunction to
the projector.
NOTE • Please replace the air filter when it is damaged or too soiled, and
also when you replace the lamp.
• When you replace the projection lamp, please replace the air filter. An air filter
of specified type will come together with a replacement lamp for this projector.
• Please reset the filter time only when you have cleaned or replaced the air
filter, for a suitable indication about the air filter.
• The projector may display the message such as “CHECK THE AIR FLOW” or
turn off the projector, to prevent the internal heat level rising.
6ꢁ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance
Internal clock battery
Consumption of the battery makes the clock not to work correctly. When the clock is wrong or it has
stopped, please replace the battery according to the following procedures.
Turn the projector off, and unplug the power cord. Allow the
ꢀ.
ꢁ.
3.
projector to cool sufficiently.
After making sure that the projector has cooled adequately,
slowly turn over the projector, so that the bottom is facing.
Battery Cover
Remove the battery cover.
Turn the battery cover in the direction indicated “OPEN”
using such as coins. Then the battery cover will come up. While
removing the battery cover, pick its knob.
OPEN
Take the old battery out.
Press the metal claw of the battery holder. Then the battery
will come up. Remove the battery.
4.
Knob
Metal claw
Put a new battery in.
5.
Replace battery with HITACHI MAXELL, Part No.CR2032
only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or
explosion.
“+” marking
Insert a new battery in the battery holder according to its minus terminal
as indicated in the battery holder, so that the side marked by
facing. And push the battery into the battery holder fully to fix.
+
is
CLOSE
Close the battery cover.
6.
Replace the battery cover in place, then turn it in the
direction indicated “CLOSE” using such as coins, to fix.
WARNING ►Always handle the batteries with care and use them only as directed. Battery
may explode if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire.
And also improper use may result in cracking or leakage, which could result in fire, injury and/or
pollution of the surrounding environment.
•
Be sure to use only the batteries specified. Do not use batteries of different types at the same
time. Do not mix a new battery with used one.
Make sure the plus and minus terminals are correctly aligned when loading a battery.
If the battery is placed in the battery holder upside-down, it may be hard to remove.
•
•
•
•
•
Keep a battery away from children and pets. If swallowed consult a physician immediately for emergency treatment.
Do not short circuit or solder a battery.
Do not allow a battery in a fire or water. Keep batteries in a dark, cool and dry place.
If you observe a leakage of a battery, wipe out the flower and then replace a battery. If the liquid
adheres to your body or clothes, rinse well with water immediately.
Obey the local laws on disposing the battery.
•
NOTE • If the battery is placed in the battery holder upside-down, follow the procedure below
to remove and reload it properly.
ꢀ. Remove the battery cover as described in steps ꢀ through 3 above.
ꢁ. Turn the projector over again, so that the top of the projector is facing up.
3. While lifting the side of the projector closest to the lens, press the metal claw of the battery
holder. The battery will fall out of the holder, so be careful not to lose it.
4. Turn the projector over once more, so that the bottom faces up, and reload the battery correctly.
•
The internal clock’s time will be reset when the battery is removed.
Please reconfigure the time via the menu or a web browser after replacing the battery.
(
2.5.7 Date/Time Settings of the - Network Functions Section)
63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance
Other care
Inside of the projector
In order to ensure the safe use of your projector, please have it cleaned and
inspected by your dealer about once every year.
Caring for the lens
If the lens is flawed, soiled or fogged, it could cause deterioration of display
quality. Please take care of the lens, being cautious of handling.
Turn the projector off, and unplug the power cord. Allow the projector to cool
sufficiently.
ꢀ.
After making sure that the projector is cool adequately, lightly wipe the lens
with a commercially available lens-cleaning wipe. Do not touch the lens
directly with your hand.
ꢁ.
Caring for the cabinet and remote control
Incorrect care could have adverse influence such as discoloration, peeling paint,
etc.
Turn the projector off, and unplug the power cord. Allow the projector to cool
sufficiently.
ꢀ.
After making sure that the projector is cool adequately, lightly wipe with gauze
or a soft cloth.
If the projector is extremely dirty, dip soft cloth in water or a neutral cleaner
diluted in water, and wipe lightly after wringing well. Then, wipe lightly with a
soft, dry cloth.
ꢁ.
WARNING ►Before caring, make sure the power switch is off and the
power cable is not plugged in, and then allow the projector to cool sufficiently.
The care in a high temperature state of the projector could cause a burn and/or
malfunction to the projector.
►Never try to care for the inside of the projector personally. Doing is so
dangerous.
►Avoid wetting the projector or inserting liquids in the projector. It could result
in a fire, an electric shock, and/or malfunction to the projector.
• Do not put anything containing water, cleaners or chemicals near the
projector.
• Do not use aerosols or sprays.
CAUTION ►Please take right care of the projector according to the
following. Incorrect care could cause not only an injury but adverse influence
such as discoloration, peeling paint, etc.
►Do not use cleaners or chemicals other than those specified in this manual.
►Do not polish or wipe with hard objects.
64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
Related messages
When the unit's power is on, messages such as those shown below may be
displayed. When any such message is displayed on the screen, please follow the
instructions described below. If the same message is displayed after the remedy,
or if a message other than the following appears, please contact your dealer or
service company.
Although these messages will be automatically disappeared around several
minutes, it will be reappeared every time the power is turned on.
Message
Description
There is no input signal.
Please confirm the signal input connection, and the status
NO INPUT IS DETECTED
of the signal source.
The horizontal or vertical frequency of the input signal
is not within the specified range.
SYNC IS OUT OF RANGE
Please confirm the specs for your projector or the signal
fH kHz fV Hz
source specs.
The internal temperature is rising.
Please turn the power off, and allow the projector to cool
down at least 20 minutes. After having confirmed the
following items, please turn the power ON again.
• Is there blockage of the air passage aperture?
• Is the air filter dirty?
CHECK THE AIR FLOW
• Does the peripheral temperature exceed 35°C?
If the same indication is displayed after the remedy, please set
FAN SPEED of the SERVICE item in the OPTION menu to HIGH.
REMINDER
*** HRS PASSED AFTER THE
LAST FILTER CHECK.
A note of precaution when cleaning the air filter.
Please immediately turn the power off, and clean or change
the air filter referring to the “Air Filter” section of this manual
FILTER MAINTENANCE IS ESSENTIAL
TO REMOVE WARNING MESSAGE,
RESET FILTER TIMER.
(
61). After you have cleaned or changed the air filter,
please be sure to reset the filter timer ( 26, 62).
SEE MANUAL FURTHER INFO.
65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
Regarding the indicator lamps
Lighting and flashing of the POWER indicator, the LAMP indicator, and the TEMP
indicator have the meanings as described in the table below. Please follow the
instructions within the table. If the same indication is displayed after the remedy,
or if an indication other than the following is displayed, please contact your dealer
or service company.
POWER
indicator indicator indicator
LAMP
TEMP
Description
Lighting
In Orange
Turned
off
Turned
off
The projector is in a standby state.
Please refer to the section “Power On/Off”.
Blinking
In Green
Turned
off
Turned
off
The projector is warming up.
Please wait.
Lighting
In Green
Turned
off
Turned
off
The projector is in an on state.
Ordinary operations may be performed.
Blinking
In Orange
Turned
off
Turned
off
The projector is cooling down.
Please wait.
The projector is cooling down. A certain error
has been detected.
Please wait until the POWER indicator finishes
blinking, and then perform the proper measure using
the item descriptions below.
Blinking
In Red
(discre- (discre-
tionary) tionary)
The lamp does not light, and there is a
possibility that interior portion has become
heated.
Please turn the power off, and allow the projector to
cool down at least ꢁ0 minutes. After the projector has
Lighting Turned sufficiently cooled down, please make confirmation of
Blinking
In Red
or
Lighting
In Red
In Red
off
the following items, and then turn the power on again.
• Is there blockage of the air passage aperture?
• Is the air filter dirty?
• Does the peripheral temperature exceed 35°C?
If the same indication is displayed after the remedy,
please change the lamp referring to the section “Lamp”.
The lamp cover has not been properly fixed.
Please turn the power off, and allow the projector to
cool down at least 45 minutes. After the projector has
sufficiently cooled down, please make confirmation
of the attachment state of the lamp cover. After
performing any needed maintenance, turn the power
on again. If the same indication is displayed after
the remedy, please contact your dealer or service
company.
Blinking
In Red
or
Lighting
In Red
Blinking Turned
In Red off
66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
Regarding the indicator lamps (continued)
POWER
indicator indicator indicator
LAMP
TEMP
Description
The cooling fan is not operating.
Please turn the power off, and allow the projector to
cool down at least ꢁ0 minutes. After the projector has
Turned Blinking sufficiently cooled down, please make confirmation
Blinking
In Red
or
Lighting
In Red
off
In Red that no foreign matter has become caught in the fan,
etc., and then turn the power on again.
If the same indication is displayed after the remedy,
please contact your dealer or service company.
There is a possibility that the interior portion
has become heated.
Please turn the power off, and allow the projector to
cool down at least ꢁ0 minutes. After the projector has
sufficiently cooled down, please make confirmation of
Blinking
In Red
or
Lighting
In Red
Turned Lighting the following items, and then turn the power on again.
off
In Red • Is there blockage of the air passage aperture?
• Is the air filter dirty?
• Does the peripheral temperature exceed 35°C?
If the same indication is displayed after the remedy,
please set FAN SPEED of the SERVICE item in the
OPTION menu to HIGH.
It is time to clean the air filter.
Please immediately turn the power off, and clean or
Lighting
In Green
Simultaneous
blinking in Red
change the air filter referring to the section “Air Filter”.
After cleaning or changing the air filter, please be sure
to reset the filter timer. After the remedy, reset the
power to ON.
There is a possibility that the interior portion
has become overcooled.
Please use the unit within the usage temperature
parameters (5°C to 35°C). After the treatment, reset
the power to ON.
Lighting
In Green
Alternative
blinking in Red
Blinking in
Green for Turned
approx. 3
seconds
At least 1 “Power ON” schedule is saved to the
projector.
(Please refer to the User’s Manual-Network Functions:
Schedule Settings for more information.)
Turned
off
off
NOTE • When the interior portion has become overheated, for safety
purposes, the power source is automatically turned off, and the indicator lamps
may also be turned off. In such a case, press the “” (OFF) side of the power
switch, and wait at least 45 minutes. After the projector has sufficiently cooled
down, please make confirmation of the attachment state of the lamp and lamp
cover, and then turn the power on again.
67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
Phenomena that may be easy to be mistaken for machine defects
WARNING ►Never use the projector if abnormal operations such as
smoke, strange odor, excessive sound, damaged casing or elements or cables,
penetration of liquids or foreign matter, etc. should occur. In such cases,
immediately turn off the power switch and then disconnect the power plug from
the power outlet. After making sure that the smoke or odor has stopped, contact
your dealer or service company.
Before requesting repair, please check in accordance
ꢀ.
with the following chart. This operation sometimes
resolves your problem.
If the situation cannot be corrected,
The projector’s microprocessor may need to be reset.
ꢁ.
Please push the Shutdown switch by using a pin or
similar and the projector will be turned off immediately.
Before turning it again, wait at least ꢀ0 minutes to make the projector cool down enough.
Some setting may be wrong. Please use the FACTORY RESET function of the
3.
(
47)
to reset all settings to factory default.
SERVICE item in the OPTION menu
Then, if the problem is not removed after the remedy, please contact your dealer
or service company.
Reference
page
Phenomenon
Cases not involving a machine defect
The electrical power cord is not plugged in.
Correctly connect the power cord.
ꢀ3
The power switch is not set to the on position.
Set the power switch to [ | ] (On).
ꢀ7
ꢀ7
The main power source has been interrupted during
operation such as by a power outage (blackout), etc.
Please turn the power off, and allow the projector to cool
down at least ꢁ minutes, then turn the power on again.
Power does not
come on.
Either there is no lamp and/or lamp cover, or either
of these has not been properly fixed.
Please turn the power off, and allow the projector to cool down
at least 45 minutes. After the projector has sufficiently cooled
down, please make confirmation of the attachment state of the
lamp and lamp cover, and then turn the power on again.
59
The signal cables are not correctly connected.
Correctly connect the connection cables.
ꢀ0
–
Signal source does not correctly work.
Correctly set up the signal source device by referring to the
manual of the source device.
Neither sounds
nor pictures are
outputted.
The input changeover settings are mismatched.
Select the input signal, and correct the settings.
ꢀ8, ꢀ9
68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
Phenomena that may be easy to be mistaken for machine defects (continued)
Reference
Phenomenon
Cases not involving a machine defect
page
The signal cables are not correctly connected.
Correctly connect the audio cables.
ꢀ0
The MUTE function is working.
Restore the sound pressing the MUTE or VOLUME button
on the remote control.
ꢀ8
ꢀ8
Sound does not
come out.
The volume is adjusted to an extremely low level.
Adjust the volume to a higher level using the menu function
or the remote control.
The AUDIO setting is not correct.
Correctly set the items in the AUDIO menu.
38
3, ꢀ7
ꢀ0
The lens cover is attached.
Remove the lens cover.
The signal cables are not correctly connected.
Correctly connect the connection cables.
The brightness is adjusted to an extremely low level.
Adjust BRIGHTNESS to a higher level using the menu
function or the remote control.
ꢁ6, ꢁ7
ꢀꢀ
No pictures are
displayed.
The computer cannot detect the projector as a plug
and play monitor.
Make sure that the computer can detect a plug and play
monitor using another plug and play monitor.
The BLANK screen is displayed.
Press the BLANK button on the remote control.
ꢁ3
ꢁꢁ
The FREEZE function is working.
Press the FREEZE button to restore the screen to normal.
Video screen
display freezes.
Color settings are not correctly adjusted.
Perform picture adjustments by changing the COLOR
TEMP, COLOR, TINT and/or COLOR SPACE settings,
using the menu functions.
ꢁ6, ꢁ8,
3ꢁ
Colors have a
faded- out
appearance, or
Color tone is
poor.
COLOR SPACE setting is not suitable.
Change the COLOR SPACE setting to AUTO, RGB,
SMPTEꢁ40, REC709 or REC60ꢀ.
3ꢁ
69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
Phenomena that may be easy to be mistaken for machine defects (continued)
Reference
page
Phenomenon
Cases not involving a machine defect
The brightness and/or contrast are adjusted to an
extremely low level.
Adjust BRIGHTNESS and/or CONTRAST settings to a
higher level using the menu function.
ꢁ6, ꢁ7
The WHISPER function is working.
Select NORMAL for the WHISPER item in the SETUP
menu.
Pictures appear
dark.
ꢁ6, 37
59, 60
The lamp is approaching the end of its product
lifetime.
Replace the lamp.
Either the focus and/or horizontal phase settings are
not properly adjusted.
Adjust the focus using the focus ring, and/or H PHASE
using the menu function.
ꢁ0, 3ꢀ
Pictures appear
blurry.
The lens is dirty or misty.
Clean the lens referring to the section “Caring for the lens”.
64
4
The exhaust ventilation holes at front is blocked by
some objects.
Pictures are
trembling.
Remove any objects from front side of the projector.
NOTE • Although bright spots or dark spots may appear on the screen, this
is a unique characteristic of liquid crystal displays, and it does not constitute or
imply a machine defect.
70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Warranty And After-Service / Specification
Warranty and after-service
If a problem occurs with the equipment, first refer to the “Troubleshooting” and run
through the suggested checks. If this does not resolve the problem, please contact your
dealer or service company. They will tell you what warranty condition is applied.
Specification
Item
Specification
Product name
Liquid crystal projector
ꢁ.0 cm (0.79 type)
Panel size
Liquid
Crystal Drive system TFT active matrix
Panel
Pixels
786,43ꢁ pixels (ꢀ0ꢁ4 horizontal x 768 vertical)
Zoom lens F=ꢀ.7 ~ ꢁ.ꢀ f=ꢁ4 ~ ꢁ9 mm
ꢁ85W UHB
Lens
Lamp
Speaker
4W x 4
Power supply
AC ꢀ00-ꢀꢁ0V/5.0A, ACꢁꢁ0-ꢁ40V/ꢁ.ꢀA
460W
Power consumption
Temperature range
5 ~ 35°C (Operating)
4ꢀ8 (W) x ꢀ39 (H) x 3ꢀ9 (D) mm
(Not including protruding parts)
* Please refer to the following figure.
Size
Weight (mass)
7.ꢀ kg
RGB input port
Audio input port
RGBꢀ.......D-sub ꢀ5pin mini xꢀ AUDIO INꢀ .......Stereo mini xꢀ
RGBꢁ.......D-sub ꢀ5pin mini xꢀ AUDIO INꢁ .......Stereo mini xꢀ
AUDIO IN3 ................. RCA xꢁ
AUDIO IN4 ................. RCA xꢁ
RGB output port
RGB OUT..D-sub ꢀ5pin mini xꢀ
Communication port
Digital input port
CONTROL.......... D-sub 9pin xꢀ
Mꢀ-D..........................Mꢀ-D xꢀ
Ports
Other ports
LAN ...............................RJ45 xꢀ
Video input port
Y, CB/PB, CR/PR .......... RCA x3
AUX I/O .................... USB(A) xꢀ
S-VIDEO ................S-video xꢀ
SD card slot ........................... xꢀ
VIDEO .......................Video xꢀ
REMOTE CONTROL
.........................Stereo mini xꢀ
Lamp
456-8943
Optional
Air filter
parts
MU0364ꢁ
Others
* Please consult your dealer.
NOTE • These specifications are subject to change without notice.
7ꢀ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications
Specifications (continued)
4ꢀ8
[unit: mm]
7ꢁ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
P8r9oje4c4tor
User's Manual
Technical
Example of computer signal
Resolution (H x V) H. frequency (kHz) V. frequency (Hz)
Rating
Signal mode
720 x 400
640 x 480
640 x 480
640 x 480
640 x 480
800 x 600
800 x 600
800 x 600
800 x 600
800 x 600
832 x 624
ꢀ024 x 768
ꢀ024 x 768
ꢀ024 x 768
ꢀ024 x 768
ꢀꢀ52 x 864
ꢀ280 x 960
ꢀ280 x ꢀ024
ꢀ280 x ꢀ024
ꢀ280 x ꢀ024
ꢀ600 x ꢀ200
ꢀ280 x 768
ꢀ400 x ꢀ050
37.9
3ꢀ.5
37.9
37.5
43.3
35.2
37.9
48.ꢀ
46.9
53.7
49.7
48.4
56.5
60.0
68.7
67.5
60.0
64.0
80.0
9ꢀ.ꢀ
75.0
47.7
65.2
85.0
59.9
72.8
75.0
85.0
56.3
60.3
72.2
75.0
85.ꢀ
74.5
60.0
70.ꢀ
75.0
85.0
75.0
60.0
60.0
75.0
85.0
60.0
60.0
60.0
VESA
VESA
VESA
VESA
VESA
VESA
VESA
VESA
VESA
VESA
TEXT
VGA (60Hz)
VGA (72Hz)
VGA (75Hz)
VGA (85Hz)
SVGA (56Hz)
SVGA (60Hz)
SVGA (72Hz)
SVGA (75Hz)
SVGA (85Hz)
Mac ꢀ6” mode
XGA (60Hz)
XGA (70Hz)
XGA (75Hz)
XGA (85Hz)
ꢀꢀ52 x 864 (75Hz)
ꢀ280 x 960 (60Hz)
SXGA (60Hz)
SXGA (75Hz)
SXGA (85Hz)
UXGA (60Hz)
W-XGA (60Hz)
SXGA+ (60Hz)
VESA
VESA
VESA
VESA
VESA
VESA
VESA
VESA
VESA
VESA
VESA
VESA
NOTE • Be sure to check jack type, signal level, timing and resolution
before connecting this projector to a computer.
• Some computers may have multiple display screen modes. Use of some of
these modes will not be possible with this projector.
• Depending on the input signal, full-size display may not be possible in some
cases. Refer to the number of display pixels above.
• Although the projector can display signals with resolution up to UXGA
(ꢀ600xꢀ200), the signal will be converted to the projector’s panel resolution
before being displayed. The best display performance will be achieved if the
resolutions of the input signal and projector panel are identical.
• Automatically adjustment may not function correctly with some input signals.
• The image may not be displayed correctly when the input sync signal is a
composite sync or a sync on G.
ꢀ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Initial set signals
Initial set signals
The following signals are used for the initial settings. The signal timing of some
computer models may be different. In such case, adjust the items V POSITION
and H POSITION in the IMAGE menu.
Back porch (B)
Front porch (D)
Back porch (b)
Front porch (d)
Display interval (C)
Display interval (c)
Data
Data
V. Sync.
H. Sync.
Sync (A)
Sync (a)
Horizontal signal timing (μs)
Vertical signal timing (lines)
Computer/
Computer/
Signal
Signal
(A)
2.0
3.8
ꢀ.3
2.0
ꢀ.6
(B)
(C)
(D)
(a)
3
2
3
3
3
2
4
6
3
3
3
6
6
3
3
(b)
42
33
28
ꢀ6
25
22
23
23
2ꢀ
27
39
29
29
28
36
(c)
(d)
ꢀ
ꢀ0
9
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
37
ꢀ
ꢀ
TEXT
3.0 20.3 ꢀ.0
ꢀ.9 25.4 0.6
4.ꢀ 20.3 0.8
3.8 20.3 0.5
2.2 ꢀ7.8 ꢀ.6
3.6 22.2 0.7
2.2 20.0 ꢀ.0
ꢀ.3 ꢀ6.0 ꢀ.ꢀ
3.2 ꢀ6.2 0.3
2.7 ꢀ4.2 0.6
3.9 ꢀ4.5 0.6
2.5 ꢀ5.8 0.4
ꢀ.9 ꢀ3.7 0.3
2.2 ꢀ3.0 0.2
2.2 ꢀ0.8 0.5
TEXT
400
480
480
480
480
600
600
600
600
600
624
768
768
768
768
VGA (60Hz)
VGA (72Hz)
VGA (75Hz)
VGA (85Hz)
VGA (60Hz)
VGA (72Hz)
VGA (75Hz)
VGA (85Hz)
SVGA (56Hz)
SVGA (60Hz)
SVGA (72Hz)
SVGA (75Hz)
SVGA (85Hz)
Mac ꢀ6" mode
XGA (60Hz)
XGA (70Hz)
XGA (75Hz)
XGA (85Hz)
SVGA (56Hz) 2.0
SVGA (60Hz) 3.2
SVGA (72Hz) 2.4
SVGA (75Hz) ꢀ.6
SVGA (85Hz) ꢀ.ꢀ
Mac ꢀ6" mode ꢀ.ꢀ
ꢀ
3
3
ꢀ
XGA (60Hz)
XGA (70Hz)
XGA (75Hz)
XGA (85Hz)
2.ꢀ
ꢀ.8
ꢀ.2
ꢀ.0
ꢀ
ꢀꢀ52 x 864
(75Hz)
ꢀ280 x 960
(60Hz)
ꢀꢀ52 x 864
(75Hz)
ꢀ280 x 960
(60Hz)
ꢀ.2
ꢀ.0
2.4 ꢀ0.7 0.6
3
3
32
36
864
960
ꢀ
ꢀ
2.9
ꢀꢀ.9
0.9
SXGA (60Hz) ꢀ.0
SXGA (75Hz) ꢀ.ꢀ
SXGA (85Hz) ꢀ.0
UXGA (60Hz) ꢀ.2
W-XGA (60Hz) ꢀ.7
SXGA+ (60Hz) ꢀ.2
2.3
ꢀ.8
ꢀ.4
ꢀ.9
ꢀꢀ.9
9.5
8.ꢀ
9.9
0.4
0.ꢀ
0.4
0.4
SXGA(60Hz)
SXGA (75Hz)
SXGA (85Hz)
UXGA (60Hz)
W-XGA (60Hz)
SXGA+ (60Hz)
3
3
3
3
3
3
38 ꢀ024
38 ꢀ024
44 ꢀ024
46 ꢀ200
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
2.5 ꢀ6.0 0.8
2.0 ꢀꢀ.4 0.7
23
768
33 ꢀ050
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connection to the ports
Connection to the ports
C
A
B
LAN
D
AUX I/
DC 5V 0.5A
RGB
OUT
RGB1
RGB2
M1-D
Y
CB/PB
VIDEO
AUDIO IN
AUDIO IN
1
2
CR/PR
L
REMOTE
CONTROL
R
L
R
AUDIO
OUT
S-VIDEO
AUDIO IN
3
AUDIO IN
4
CONTROL
A
B
C
RGB IN1, RGB IN2, RGB OUT
D-sub ꢀ5pin mini shrink jack
• Video signal: RGB separate, Analog, 0.7Vp-p,
ꢀꢀ ꢀ2 ꢀ3 ꢀ4 ꢀ5
75Ω terminated (positive)
• H/V. sync. Signal: TTL level (positive/negative)
• Composite sync. Signal: TTL level
6
7
8
9
ꢀ0
ꢀ
2
3
4
5
At RGB signal
Pin
Pin
ꢀ
2
Signal
Signal
Video Red
Video Green
Video Blue
9
(No connection)
ꢀ0 Ground
ꢀꢀ (No connection)
3
4
A
B C
(No connection)
Ground
Ground Red
Ground Green
Ground Blue
ꢀ2
: SDA (DDC data),
/
: (No connection)
: (No connection)
5
6
7
ꢀ3 H. sync / Composite sync.
ꢀ4 V. sync.
A
B C
/
ꢀ5
: SCL (DDC clock),
8
D
M1-D
30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 2ꢀ
20 ꢀ9 ꢀ8 ꢀ7 ꢀ6 ꢀ5 ꢀ4 ꢀ3 ꢀ2 ꢀꢀ
• Type: T.M.D.S
• Amplitude differential: DC ꢀ50-ꢀ200mV/AC ꢀ.56 Vp-p
• Amplitude: TTL level (positive/negative)
6
ꢀ0
9
8
7
5
4
3
2
ꢀ
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
ꢀ
2
3
T.M.D.S. Data2 +
T.M.D.S. Data2 -
T.M.D.S. Data2 Return
ꢀꢀ T.M.D.S. Dataꢀ +
ꢀ2 T.M.D.S. Dataꢀ -
ꢀ3 T.M.D.S. Dataꢀ Return
2ꢀ T.M.D.S. Data0 +
22 T.M.D.S. Data0 -
23 T.M.D.S. Data0 Return
4
T.M.D.S. Clock Return
ꢀ4 T.M.D.S. Clock +
24 USB +5V DC Input
5
6
(No connection)
V.Sync.
ꢀ5 T.M.D.S. Clock -
ꢀ6 USB Data +
25 DDC & USB Return
26 DDC Data (SDA)
7
8
9
(No connection)
ꢀ7 USB Data -
27 DDC Clock (SCL)
28 DDC +5V DC Input
29 (No connection)
30 (No connection)
Hot Plug Detect (+5V DC Output)
(No connection)
ꢀ8 (No connection)
ꢀ9 (No connection)
20 (No connection)
ꢀ0 (No connection)
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connection to the ports (continued)
LAN
AUX I/O
DC 5V 0.5A
I
E
F
G
RGB
OUT
1
RGB2
M1-D
Y
CB/PB
VIDEO
AUDIO IN
AUDIO IN
1
2
CR/PR
H
REMOTE
R
L
R
L
AUDIO
OUT
CONTROL
S-VIDEO
AUDIO IN
3
AUDIO IN
4
CONTROL
E
F
G
COMPONENT VIDEO Y, CB/PB,
CR/PR
RCA jack x3
• System: 525i(480i), 525p(480p), 625i(576i), 750p(720p), ꢀꢀ25i(ꢀ080i)
Port
Y
Signal
Component video Y, 1.0±0.1Vp-p, 75Ω terminator with composite
B
CB/P Component video CB/PB, 0.7±0.1Vp-p, 75Ω terminator
R
R
C /P Component video CR/PR, 0.7±0.1Vp-p, 75Ω terminator
H
S-VIDEO
ꢀ
2
Mini DIN 4pin jack
3
4
Pin
Signal
Color signal 0.286Vp-p (NTSC, burst), 75Ω terminator
Color signal 0.300Vp-p (PAL/SECAM, burst) 75Ω terminator
Brightness signal, 1.0Vp-p, 75Ω terminator
Ground
Ground
ꢀ
2
3
4
I
VIDEO
RCA jack
• System: NTSC, PAL, SECAM, PAL-M, PAL-N, NTSC4.43
• 1.0±0.1Vp-p, 75Ω terminator
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connection to the ports (continued)
LAN
AUX I/O
DC 5V 0.5A
J
RGB
OUT
RB1
RGB2
M-D
K
Q
R
L
M
N
O
P
A
2
AUDIN
C/PR
REMOTE
CONTROL
R
L
R
L
AUDIO
OUT
S-VIDEO
AUDIO IN
3
AUDIO IN
4
CONTROL
J
K
AUDIO IN 1, AUDIO IN 2
Ø3.5 stereo mini jack
• 500 mVrms 47kΩ terminator
L
M
N
O
AUDIO IN 3 R, L, AUDIO IN 4 R,
L
RCA jack x2
• 500 mVrms 47kΩ terminator
P
AUDIO OUT
Ø3.5 stereo mini jack
• 500 mVrms 1kΩ output impedance
Q
REMOTE CONTROL
Ø3.5 stereo mini jack
• To be connected with the remote control that came with the projector.
R
CONTROL
ꢀ
2
3
4
5
D-sub 9pin plug
6
7
8
9
• About the details of RS-232C communication, please refer to the following page.
Pin
ꢀ
Signal
(No connection)
Pin
4
Signal
(No connection)
Ground
Pin
7
Signal
RTS
CTS
2
3
RD
TD
5
6
8
9
(No connection)
(No connection)
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connection to the ports (continued)
S
T
U
LAN
AUX I/O
DC 5V 0.5A
RGB
OUT
RGB1
RGB2
M1-D
Y
CB/PB
VIDEO
AUDIO IN
AUDIO IN
1
2
CR/PR
L
REMOTE
R
L
R
AUDIO
OUT
CONTROL
S-VIDEO
AUDIO IN
3
AUDIO IN
4
CONTROL
S
LAN
RJ-45 jack
ꢀ
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Pin
ꢀ
2
Signal
TX+
TX-
Pin
Signal
Pin
7
8
Signal
4
5
6
-
-
-
-
3
RX+
RX-
T
AUX I/O
USB A type jack
Pin
ꢀ
Signal
+5V
4
3
2
ꢀ
2
3
4
- Data
+ Data
Gtound
U
SD card slot
SD card slot
Pin
ꢀ
2
Signal
CD/DAT 3
CMD
Pin
4
5
Signal
Pin
7
8
Signal
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
ꢀ
9
VDD
CLK
VSS
DAT 0
DAT ꢀ
DAT 2
3
VSS
6
9
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RS-232C Communication
RS-232C Communication
ꢀ
2
3
4
5
ꢀ
2
3
4
5
6
6
8
8
7
9
7
9
CONTROL port
of the projector
RS-232C cable (Cross)
RS-232C port
of the computer
- (ꢀ)
RD (2)
TD (3)
- (4)
(ꢀ) CD
(2) RD
(3) TD
(4) DTR
(5) GND
(6) DSR
(7) RTS
(8) DTS
(9) RI
GND (5)
- (6)
RTS (7)
CTS (8)
- (9)
Connecting the cable
ꢀ. Turn off the projector and the computer.
Connect the CONTROL port of the projector with a RS-232C port of
the computer by a RS-232C cable (cross). Use the cable that fulfills the
specification shown in the previous page.
2.
Turn the computer on, and after the computer has started up turn the
projector on.
3.
Communications setting
ꢀ9200bps, 8Nꢀ
1. Protocol
Consist of header (7 bytes) + command data (6 bytes).
2. Header
BE + EF + 03 + 06 + 00 + CRC_low + CRC_high
CRC_low : Lower byte of CRC flag for command data
CRC_high : Upper byte of CRC flag for command data
3. Command data
Command data chart
byte_0
byte_ꢀ
byte_2
byte_3
high
byte_4
Setting code
low
byte_5
high
Action
Type
low
high
low
Action (byte_0 - ꢀ)
Action
Classification
Content
ꢀ
2
4
5
6
SET
GET
Change setting to desired value.
Read projector internal setup value.
INCREMENT Increment setup value by ꢀ.
DECREMENT Decrement setup value by ꢀ.
EXECUTE
Run a command.
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RS-232C Communication (continued)
Requesting projector status (Get command)
(ꢀ) Send the request code Header + Command data (‘02H’+‘00H’+ type (2 bytes)+
‘00H’ +‘00H’) from the computer to the projector.
(2) The projector returns the response code ‘ꢀDH’+ data (2 bytes) to the computer.
Changing the projector settings (Set command)
(ꢀ) Send the setting code Header + Command data (‘0ꢀH’+‘00H’+ type (2 bytes) +
setting code (2 bytes)) from the computer to the projector.
(2) The projector changes the setting based on the above setting code.
(3) The projector returns the response code ‘06H’ to the computer.
Using the projector default settings (Reset Command)
(ꢀ) The computer sends the default setting code Header + Command data (‘06H’+
‘00H’ + type (2 bytes) +‘00H’+‘00H’) to the projector.
(2) The projector changes the specified setting to the default value.
(3) The projector returns the response code ‘06H’ to the computer.
Increasing the projector setting value (Increment command)
(ꢀ) The computer sends the increment code Header + Command data (‘04H’+
‘00H’+ type (2 bytes) +‘00H’+‘00H’) to the projector.
(2) The projector in creases the setting value on the above setting code.
(3) The projector returns the response code ‘06H’ to the computer.
Decreasing the projector setting value (Decrement command)
(ꢀ) The computer sends the decrement code Header + Command data (‘05H’+
‘00H’+ type (2 bytes) +‘00H’ + ‘00H’) to the projector.
(2) The projector decreases the setting value on the above setting code.
(3) The projector returns the response code ‘06H’ to the computer.
When the projector cannot understand the received command
When the projector cannot understand the received command, the error code ‘ꢀ5H’
is sent back to the computer.
Sometimes the projector cannot properly receive the command. In such a
case, the command is not executed and the error code ‘ꢀ5H’ is sent back to the
computer. If this error code is returned, send the same command again.
When the projector cannot execute the received command.
When the projector cannot execute the received command, the error code ‘ꢀCH’
+ ‘xxxxH’ is sent back to the computer. When the data length is greater than
indicated by the data length code, the projector ignore the excess data code.
Conversely when the data length is shorter than indicated by the data length
code, an error code will be returned to the computer.
NOTE • Operation cannot be guaranteed when the projector receives an undefined
command or data.
• Provide an interval of at least 40ms between the response code and any other code.
• The projector outputs test data when the power supply is switched ON, and when the
lamp is lit. Ignore this data.
• Commands are not accepted during warm-up.
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RS-232C Communication (continued)
Command Data
Names
Power
Operation Type
Header
CRC
Action
Type
Setting Code
Set
Set
Turn off
Turn on
Get
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
03
03
03
06 00
06 00
06 00
2A D3
BA D2
19 D3
01 00
01 00
02 00
00 60
00 60
00 60
00 00
01 00
00 00
[Example return]
00 00
01 00
[On]
02 00
[Cool down]
[Off]
Input Source
RGB1
RGB2
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
06 00
FE D2
3E D0
0E D2
6E D3
9E D3
AE D1
5E D1
CD D2
D9 D8
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
02 00
02 00
00 20
00 20
00 20
00 20
00 20
00 20
00 20
00 20
20 60
00 00
04 00
03 00
01 00
02 00
05 00
06 00
00 00
00 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
M1-D
VIDEO
S-VIDEO
COMPONENT
MIU
Get
Error Status
Get
[Example return]
00 00
01 00
[Cover error]
05 00
[Air flow error]
09 00
(Filter missing error)(Inner Sencer error)
02 00
[Fan error]
06 00
[Lamp time error]
10 00
03 00
[Normal]
[Lamp error]
07 00
04 00
[Temp error]
08 00
[Cool error]
[Filter error]
BRIGHTNESS
Get
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
89 D2
EF D2
3E D3
58 D3
FD D3
9B D3
4A D2
A4 D2
23 F6
B3 F7
E3 F4
E3 EF
73 EE
83 EE
10 F6
02 00
04 00
05 00
06 00
02 00
04 00
05 00
06 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
02 00
03 20
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
01 00
04 00
20 00
21 00
22 00
00 00
Increment
Decrement
Execute
03 20
03 20
00 70
04 20
04 20
04 20
01 70
BA 30
BA 30
BA 30
BA 30
BA 30
BA 30
BA 30
BRIGHTNESS Reset
CONTRAST
Get
Increment
Decrement
Execute
CONTRAST Reset
PICTURE MODE
Set
NORMAL
CINEMA
DYNAMIC
BOARD(BLACK)
BOARD(GREEN)
WHITEBOARD
Get
[Example return]
00 00
[Normal]
20 00
01 00
[Cinema] [Dynamic] [Custom]
21 00 22 00
[BOARD(BLACK) ] [BOARD(GREEN)] [WHITEBOARD]
04 00
10 00
GAMMA
Set
#1 DEFAULT
#1 CUSTOM
#2 DEFAULT
#2 CUSTOM
#3 DEFAULT
#3 CUSTOM
#4 DEFAULT
#4 CUSTOM
#5 DEFAULT
#5 CUSTOM
Get
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
07 E9
07 FD
97 E8
97 FC
67 E8
67 FC
F7 E9
F7 FD
C7 EB
C7 FF
F4 F0
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
02 00
A1 30
A1 30
A1 30
A1 30
A1 30
A1 30
A1 30
A1 30
A1 30
A1 30
A1 30
20 00
10 00
21 00
11 00
22 00
12 00
23 00
13 00
24 00
14 00
00 00
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RS-232C Communication (continued)
Command Data
Names
Operation Type
Header
CRC
Action
Type
Setting Code
User Gamma Pattern Set
Off
9 step gray scale
15 steps gray scale
Ramp
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
FB FA
6B FB
9B FB
0B FA
C8 FA
08 FE
6E FE
BF FF
F4 FF
92 FF
43 FE
B0 FF
D6 FF
07 FE
4C FE
2A FE
FB FF
38 FF
5E FF
8F FE
C4 FE
A2 FE
73 FF
80 FE
E6 FE
37 FF
7C FF
1A FF
CB FE
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
02 00
02 00
04 00
05 00
02 00
04 00
05 00
02 00
04 00
05 00
02 00
04 00
05 00
02 00
04 00
05 00
02 00
04 00
05 00
02 00
04 00
05 00
02 00
04 00
05 00
80 30
80 30
80 30
80 30
80 30
90 30
90 30
90 30
91 30
91 30
91 30
92 30
92 30
92 30
93 30
93 30
93 30
94 30
94 30
94 30
95 30
95 30
95 30
96 30
96 30
96 30
97 30
97 30
97 30
00 00
01 00
02 00
03 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
Get
User Gamma Point 1
User Gamma Point 2
User Gamma Point 3
User Gamma Point 4
User Gamma Point 5
User Gamma Point 6
User Gamma Point 7
User Gamma Point 8
Get
Increment
Decrement
Get
Increment
Decrement
Get
Increment
Decrement
Get
Increment
Decrement
Get
Increment
Decrement
Get
Increment
Decrement
Get
Increment
Decrement
Get
Increment
Decrement
COLOR TEMP
Set
LOW
MID
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
6B F4
9B F4
0B F5
3B F2
AB F3
AB F9
5B F9
CB F8
FB FF
6B FE
C8 F5
34 F4
52 F4
83 F5
70 F4
16 F4
C7 F5
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
02 00
02 00
04 00
05 00
02 00
04 00
05 00
B0 30
B0 30
B0 30
B0 30
B0 30
01 00
02 00
03 00
08 00
09 00
11 00
12 00
13 00
18 00
19 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
HIGH
Hi-BRIGHT-1
Hi-BRIGHT-2
CUSTOM-LOW
CUSTOM-MID
CUSTOM-HIGH
B0 30
B0 30
B0 30
B0 30
B0 30
B0 30
B1 30
B1 30
B1 30
B2 30
B2 30
B2 30
CUSTOM-Hi-BRIGHT-1 BE EF
CUSTOM-Hi-BRIGHT-2 BE EF
Get
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
COLOR TEMP GAIN R
COLOR TEMP GAIN G
Get
Increment
Decrement
Get
Increment
Decrement
ꢀ0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RS-232C Communication (continued)
Command Data
Names
Operation Type
Header
CRC
Action
Type
Setting Code
COLOR TEMP GAIN B
Get
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
8C F5
EA F5
3B F4
04 F5
62 F5
B3 F4
40 F5
26 F5
F7 F4
BC F4
DA F4
0B F5
02 00
04 00
05 00
02 00
04 00
05 00
02 00
04 00
05 00
02 00
04 00
05 00
B3 30
B3 30
B3 30
B5 30
B5 30
B5 30
B6 30
B6 30
B6 30
B7 30
B7 30
B7 30
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
Increment
Decrement
Get
COLOR TEMP
OFFSET R
Increment
Decrement
Get
COLOR TEMP
OFFSET G
Increment
Decrement
Get
COLOR TEMP
OFFSET B
Increment
Decrement
COLOR
Get
Increment
Decrement
Execute
Get
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
B5 72
D3 72
02 73
80 D0
49 73
2F 73
FE 72
7C D1
F1 72
97 72
46 73
C4 D0
0E D7
9E D6
6E D6
FE D7
F2 D6
62 D7
92 D7
02 D6
4A 72
DA 73
2A 73
79 72
E6 70
76 71
86 71
D5 70
26 72
D6 72
46 73
85 73
02 00
04 00
05 00
06 00
02 00
04 00
05 00
06 00
02 00
04 00
05 00
06 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
02 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
02 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
02 00
02 22
02 22
02 22
0A 70
03 22
03 22
03 22
0B 70
01 22
01 22
01 22
09 70
14 20
14 20
14 20
14 20
15 20
15 20
15 20
15 20
07 22
07 22
07 22
07 22
0A 22
0A 22
0A 22
0A 22
06 22
06 22
06 22
06 22
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
01 00
02 00
03 00
00 00
01 00
02 00
03 00
00 00
01 00
02 00
00 00
00 00
01 00
02 00
00 00
01 00
02 00
03 00
00 00
COLOR Reset
TINT
Increment
Decrement
Execute
Get
TINT Reset
SHARPNESS
Increment
Decrement
Execute
1
SHARPNESS Reset
MY MEMORY Load Set
2
3
4
MY MEMORY Save Set
1
2
3
4
PROGRESSIVE
3D-YCS
Set
Set
Set
TURN OFF
TV
FILM
Get
TURN OFF
MOVIE
STILL
Get
VIDEO NR
LOW
MID
HIGH
Get
ꢀꢀ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RS-232C Communication (continued)
Command Data
Names
Operation Type
Header
CRC
Action
Type
Setting Code
Set
4:3
16:9
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
9E D0
0E D1
CE D6
FE D1
5E DD
AD D0
91 70
F7 70
26 71
EC D9
0D 83
6B 83
BA 82
E0 D2
F1 82
97 82
46 83
1C D3
49 83
2F 83
FE 82
B5 82
D3 82
02 83
68 D2
91 D0
0E 72
01 00
01 00
01 00
08 20
08 20
08 20
00 00
01 00
09 00
ASPECT
14:9
SMALL
NORMAL
Get
01 00
01 00
02 00
02 00
04 00
05 00
06 00
02 00
04 00
05 00
06 00
02 00
04 00
05 00
06 00
02 00
04 00
05 00
02 00
04 00
05 00
06 00
06 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
02 00
01 00
01 00
02 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
02 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
02 00
08 20
08 20
08 20
09 22
09 22
09 22
27 70
00 21
00 21
00 21
02 70
01 21
01 21
01 21
03 70
03 21
03 21
03 21
02 21
02 21
02 21
04 70
0A 20
04 22
04 22
04 22
04 22
04 22
04 22
17 20
17 20
17 20
11 22
11 22
11 22
11 22
11 22
11 22
11 22
11 22
12 22
12 22
12 22
12 22
12 22
12 22
12 22
12 22
02 00
10 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
01 00
02 00
03 00
04 00
00 00
00 00
01 00
00 00
0A 00
04 00
05 00
09 00
02 00
08 00
07 00
00 00
0A 00
04 00
05 00
09 00
02 00
08 00
07 00
00 00
Get
OVER SCAN
Increment
Decrement
Execute
Get
OVER SCAN Reset
V POSITION
Increment
Decrement
Execute
Get
V POSITION Reset
H POSITION
Increment
Decrement
Execute
Get
H POSITION Reset
H PHASE
Increment
Decrement
Get
H SIZE
Increment
Decrement
Execute
Execute
AUTO
H SIZE Reset
AUTO ADJUST
COLOR SPACE
Set
RGB
9E 73
6E 73
FE 72
CE 70
3D 72
4A D7
DA D6
79 D7
A2 70
C2 74
52 75
52 70
62 77
C2 71
32 74
31 76
E6 70
86 74
16 75
16 70
26 77
86 71
76 74
75 76
SMPTE240
REC709
REC601
Get
Set
Set
COMPONENT
SCART RGB
Get
COMPONENT
AUTO
C-VIDEO FORMAT
NTSC
PAL
SECAM
NTSC4.43
M-PAL
N-PAL
Get
Set
AUTO
S-VIDEO FORMAT
NTSC
PAL
SECAM
NTSC4.43
M-PAL
N-PAL
Get
ꢀ2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RS-232C Communication (continued)
Command Data
Names
M1-D
Operation Type
Header
CRC
Action
Type
Setting Code
Set
Set
Set
NORMAL
ENHANCED
Get
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
3E D9
AE D8
0D D9
5E D7
CE D6
0D D6
A2 D6
32 D7
F1 D7
01 00
01 00
02 00
01 00
01 00
02 00
01 00
01 00
02 00
20 20
20 20
20 20
10 20
10 20
10 20
11 20
11 20
11 20
00 00
01 00
00 00
02 00
03 00
00 00
02 00
03 00
00 00
RGB 1
RGB 2
SYNC ON G OFF
SYNC ON G ON
Get
SYNC ON G OFF
SYNC ON G ON
Get
FRAME LOCK
KEYSTONE V
Set
TURN OFF
TURN ON
Get
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
CB D6
5B D7
F8 D6
B9 D3
DF D3
0E D2
08 D0
E9 D0
8F D0
5E D1
98 D8
0B 22
01 00
01 00
02 00
02 00
04 00
05 00
06 00
02 00
04 00
05 00
06 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
02 00
01 00
01 00
02 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
02 00
02 00
04 00
05 00
02 00
04 00
05 00
02 00
04 00
05 00
02 00
04 00
05 00
02 00
04 00
05 00
14 30
14 30
14 30
07 20
07 20
07 20
0C 70
0B 20
0B 20
0B 20
20 70
04 33
04 33
04 33
04 33
00 33
00 33
00 33
01 30
01 30
01 30
01 30
01 30
60 20
60 20
60 20
64 20
64 20
64 20
63 20
63 20
63 20
61 20
61 20
61 20
62 20
62 20
62 20
00 00
01 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
10 00
11 00
00 00
00 00
01 00
00 00
00 00
01 00
02 00
03 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
Get
Increment
Decrement
Execute
Get
KEYSTONE V Reset
KEYSTONE H
Increment
Decrement
Execute
TURN OFF
THEATER
PRESENTATION
Get
KEYSTONE H Reset
ACTIVE IRIS
Set
CB SF
5B 2E
38 22
WHISPER
MIRROR
Set
Set
NORMAL
WHISPER
Get
3B 23
AB 22
08 23
NORMAL
H:INVERT
V:INVERT
H&V:INVERT
Get
C7 D2
57 D3
A7 D3
37 D2
F4 D2
CD CC
AB CC
7A CD
FD CD
9B CD
4A CC
89 CC
EF CC
3E CD
31 CD
57 CD
86 CC
75 CD
13 CD
C2 CC
VOLUME-RGB1
VOLUME-RGB2
VOLUME-M1-D
VOLUME-Video
VOLUME-S-Video
Get
Increment
Decrement
Get
Increment
Decrement
Get
Increment
Decrement
Get
Increment
Decrement
Get
Increment
Decrement
ꢀ3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RS-232C Communication (continued)
Command Data
Names
Operation Type
Header
CRC
Action
Type
Setting Code
VOLUME-Component
Get
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
03
03
03
03
03
03
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
01 CC
67 CC
B6 CD
45 CC
23 CC
F2 CD
02 00
04 00
05 00
02 00
04 00
05 00
65 20
65 20
65 20
66 20
66 20
66 20
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
Increment
Decrement
Get
VOLUME – MIU
Increment
Decrement
TREBLE-RGB1
TREBLE-RGB2
TREBLE-M1-D
TREBLE-Video
TREBLE-S-Video
TREBLE-Component
TREBLE – MIU
BASS-RGB1
Get
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
0D C8
6B C8
BA C9
3D C9
5B C9
8A C8
49 C8
2F C8
FE C9
F1 C9
97 C9
46 C8
B5 C9
D3 C9
02 C8
C1 C8
A7 C8
76 C9
85 C8
E3 C8
32 C9
0D FB
6B FB
BA FA
3D FA
5B FA
8A FB
49 FB
2F FB
FE FA
F1 FA
97 FA
46 FB
B5 FA
D3 FA
02 FB
C1 FB
A7 FB
76 FA
02 00
04 00
05 00
02 00
04 00
05 00
02 00
04 00
05 00
02 00
04 00
05 00
02 00
04 00
05 00
02 00
04 00
05 00
02 00
04 00
05 00
02 00
04 00
05 00
02 00
04 00
05 00
02 00
04 00
05 00
02 00
04 00
05 00
02 00
04 00
05 00
02 00
04 00
05 00
70 20
70 20
70 20
74 20
74 20
74 20
73 20
73 20
73 20
71 20
71 20
71 20
72 20
72 20
72 20
75 20
75 20
75 20
76 20
76 20
76 20
80 20
80 20
80 20
84 20
84 20
84 20
83 20
83 20
83 20
81 20
81 20
81 20
82 20
82 20
82 20
85 20
85 20
85 20
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
Increment
Decrement
Get
Increment
Decrement
Get
Increment
Decrement
Get
Increment
Decrement
Get
Increment
Decrement
Get
Increment
Decrement
Get
Increment
Decrement
Get
Increment
Decrement
Get
BASS-RGB2
Increment
Decrement
Get
BASS-M1-D
Increment
Decrement
Get
BASS-Video
Increment
Decrement
Get
BASS-S-Video
BASS-Component
Increment
Decrement
Get
Increment
Decrement
ꢀ4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RS-232C Communication (continued)
Command Data
Names
Operation Type
Header
CRC
Action
Type
Setting Code
BASS – MIU
Get
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
03
03
03
06 00
06 00
06 00
85 FB
E3 FB
32 FA
02 00
04 00
05 00
86 20
86 20
86 20
00 00
00 00
00 00
Increment
Decrement
SRS WOW – RGB1 Set
SRS WOW – RGB2 Set
SRS WOW – M1-D Set
SRS WOW – Video Set
SRS WOW – S-Video Set
SRS WOW – Component Set
TURN OFF
MID
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
FE FF
9E FE
0E FF
CD FF
CE FE
AE FF
3E FF
FD FE
BA FF
DA FE
4A FF
89 FF
02 FE
62 FF
F2 FE
31 FE
46 FE
26 FF
B6 FE
75 FE
32 FF
52 FE
C2 FF
01 FF
76 FF
16 FE
86 FF
45 FF
01 00
01 00
01 00
02 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
02 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
02 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
02 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
02 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
02 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
02 00
90 20
90 20
90 20
90 20
94 20
94 20
94 20
94 20
93 20
93 20
93 20
93 20
91 20
91 20
91 20
91 20
92 20
92 20
92 20
92 20
95 20
95 20
95 20
95 20
96 20
96 20
96 20
96 20
00 00
02 00
03 00
00 00
00 00
02 00
03 00
00 00
00 00
02 00
03 00
00 00
00 00
02 00
03 00
00 00
00 00
02 00
03 00
00 00
00 00
02 00
03 00
00 00
00 00
02 00
03 00
00 00
HIGH
Get
TURN OFF
MID
HIGH
Get
TURN OFF
MID
HIGH
Get
TURN OFF
MID
HIGH
Get
TURN OFF
MID
HIGH
Get
TURN OFF
MID
HIGH
Get
SRS WOW – MIU
Set
TURN OFF
MID
HIGH
Get
MUTE
Set
Set
TURN OFF
TURN ON
Get
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
03
03
03
03
03
03
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
46 D3
D6 D2
75 D3
6E D5
FE D4
5D D5
01 00
01 00
02 00
01 00
01 00
02 00
02 20
02 20
02 20
1C 20
1C 20
1C 20
00 00
01 00
00 00
00 00
01 00
00 00
SPEAKER
TURN OFF
TURN ON
Get
AUDIO - RGB1
Set
TURN OFF
Audio1
Audio2
Audio3
Audio4
Get
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
03
03
03
03
03
03
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
FE DD
6E DC
9E DC
0E DD
3E DF
CD DD
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
02 00
30 20
30 20
30 20
30 20
30 20
30 20
00 00
01 00
02 00
03 00
04 00
00 00
ꢀ5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RS-232C Communication (continued)
Command Data
Names
Operation Type
Header
CRC
Action
Type
Setting Code
AUDIO - RGB2
Set
Set
Set
Set
TURN OFF
Audio1
Audio2
Audio3
Audio4
Get
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
CE DC
5E DD
AE DD
3E DC
0E DE
FD DC
BA DD
2A DC
DA DC
4A DD
7A DF
89 DD
02 DC
92 DD
62 DD
F2 DC
C2 DE
31 DC
46 DC
D6 DD
26 DD
B6 DC
86 DE
75 DC
32 DD
A2 DC
52 DC
C2 DD
F2 DF
01 DD
76 DD
E6 DC
16 DC
86 DD
B6 DF
B6 D0
45 DD
FF 32
6F 33
CC 32
03 33
93 32
30 33
47 33
D7 32
74 33
FF 3D
6F 3C
CC 3D
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
02 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
02 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
02 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
02 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
02 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
02 00
01 00
01 00
02 00
01 00
01 00
02 00
01 00
01 00
02 00
01 00
01 00
02 00
34 20
34 20
34 20
34 20
34 20
34 20
33 20
33 20
33 20
33 20
33 20
33 20
31 20
31 20
31 20
31 20
31 20
31 20
32 20
32 20
32 20
32 20
32 20
32 20
35 20
35 20
35 20
35 20
35 20
35 20
36 20
36 20
36 20
36 20
36 20
36 20
36 20
00 26
00 26
00 26
01 26
01 26
01 26
02 26
02 26
02 26
30 26
30 26
30 26
00 00
01 00
02 00
03 00
04 00
00 00
00 00
01 00
02 00
03 00
04 00
00 00
00 00
01 00
02 00
03 00
04 00
00 00
00 00
01 00
02 00
03 00
04 00
00 00
00 00
01 00
02 00
03 00
04 00
00 00
00 00
01 00
02 00
03 00
04 00
10 00
00 00
00 00
01 00
00 00
00 00
01 00
00 00
00 00
01 00
00 00
00 00
01 00
00 00
AUDIO - M1-D
AUDIO - Video
AUDIO - S-Video
TURN OFF
Audio1
Audio2
Audio3
Audio4
Get
TURN OFF
Audio1
Audio2
Audio3
Audio4
Get
TURN OFF
Audio1
Audio2
Audio3
Audio4
Get
AUDIO - Component Set
TURN OFF
Audio1
Audio2
Audio3
Audio4
Get
AUDIO – MIU
Set
TURN OFF
Audio1
Audio2
Audio3
Audio4
MIU
Get
IR REMOTE Front
IR REMOTE Rear
IR REMOTE Top
Set
Set
Set
Off
On
Get
Off
On
Get
Off
On
Get
IR REMOTE FREQ. Set
NORMAL
Off
On
Get
ꢀ6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RS-232C Communication (continued)
Command Data
Names
Operation Type
Header
CRC
Action
Type
Setting Code
IR REMOTE FREQ. Set
HIGH
Off
On
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
03
03
03
06 00
06 00
06 00
03 3C
93 3D
30 3C
01 00
01 00
02 00
31 26
31 26
31 26
00 00
01 00
00 00
Get
LANGUAGE
Set
ENGLISH
FRANÇAIS
DEUTSCH
ESPAÑOL
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
F7 D3
67 D2
97 D2
07 D3
37 D1
A7 D0
57 D0
C7 D1
37 D4
A7 D5
37 DE
57 D5
C7 D4
F7 D6
67 D7
97 D7
07 D6
C4 D3
04 D7
62 D7
B3 D6
DC C6
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
02 00
02 00
04 00
05 00
06 00
05 30
05 30
05 30
05 30
05 30
05 30
05 30
05 30
05 30
05 30
05 30
05 30
05 30
05 30
05 30
05 30
05 30
05 30
15 30
15 30
15 30
43 70
00 00
01 00
02 00
03 00
04 00
05 00
06 00
07 00
08 00
09 00
10 00
0A 00
0B 00
0C 00
0D 00
0E 00
0F 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
ITALIANO
NORSK
NEDERLANDS
PORTUGUÊS
SVENSKA
PУCCKИЙ
SUOMI
POLSKI
TÜRKÇE
Get
MENU POSITION H
Get
Increment
Decrement
Execute
MENU POSITION H
Reset
MENU POSITION V
Get
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
03
03
03
03
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
40 D7
26 D7
F7 D6
A8 C7
02 00
04 00
05 00
06 00
16 30
16 30
16 30
44 70
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
Increment
Decrement
Execute
MENU POSITION V
Reset
BLANK
Set
My Screen
ORIGINAL
BLUE
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
FB CA
FB E2
CB D3
6B D0
9B D0
08 D3
FB D8
6B D9
C8 D8
CB CB
0B D2
9B D3
38 D2
3B EF
AB EE
08 EF
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
02 00
01 00
01 00
02 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
02 00
01 00
01 00
02 00
00 30
00 30
00 30
00 30
00 30
00 30
20 30
20 30
20 30
04 30
04 30
04 30
04 30
C0 30
C0 30
C0 30
20 00
40 00
03 00
05 00
06 00
00 00
00 00
01 00
00 00
20 00
00 00
01 00
00 00
00 00
01 00
00 00
ꢀ7
WHITE
BLACK
Get
BLANK On/Off
START UP
Set
Set
TURN OFF
TURN ON
Get
My Screen
ORIGINAL
TURN OFF
Get
My Screen LOCK
Set
TURN OFF
TURN ON
Get
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RS-232C Communication (continued)
Command Data
Names
Operation Type
Header
CRC
Action
Type
Setting Code
MESSAGE
Set
Set
TURN OFF
TURN ON
Get
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
8F D6
1F D7
BC D6
B6 D6
26 D7
85 D6
08 86
6E 86
BF 87
3B 89
01 00
01 00
02 00
01 00
01 00
02 00
02 00
04 00
05 00
01 00
01 00
02 00
02 00
06 00
02 00
06 00
17 30
17 30
17 30
16 20
16 20
16 20
10 31
10 31
10 31
20 31
20 31
20 31
90 10
30 70
A0 10
40 70
00 00
01 00
00 00
00 00
01 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
01 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
AUTO SEARCH
AUTO OFF
TURN OFF
TURN ON
Get
Get
Increment
Decrement
TURN OFF
TURN ON
Get
AUTO ON
Set
AB 88
08 89
LAMP TIME
LAMP TIME Reset
FILTER TIME
Get
C2 FF
58 DC
C2 F0
98 C6
Execute
Get
FILER TIME Reset
Execute
AUTO KEYSTONE
EXECUTE
Execute
BE EF
03
06 00
E5 D1
06 00
0D 20
00 00
AUTO KEYSTONE
Set
Set
TURN OFF
TURN ON
Get
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
EA D1
7A D0
D9 D1
3A 33
FA 31
CA 33
6A 30
5A 32
AA 32
9A 30
FA 3E
6A 3F
01 00
01 00
02 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
0F 20
0F 20
0F 20
00 36
00 36
00 36
00 36
00 36
00 36
00 36
00 36
00 36
00 00
01 00
00 00
00 00
04 00
03 00
05 00
02 00
01 00
06 00
10 00
11 00
MY BUTTON-1
RGB1
RGB2
M1-D
COMPONENT
S-VIDEO
VIDEO
MIU
INFORMATION
AUTO KEYSTONE
EXECUTE
MY MEMORY
PICTURE MODE
FILTER RESET
ACTIVE IRIS
e-SHOT
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
9A 3F
0A 3E
3A 3C
AA 3D
5A 3D
CA 3C
3A 39
09 33
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
02 00
00 36
00 36
00 36
00 36
00 36
00 36
00 36
00 36
12 00
13 00
14 00
15 00
16 00
17 00
18 00
00 00
VOLUME +
VOLUME -
Get
ꢀ8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RS-232C Communication (continued)
Command Data
Names
Operation Type
Header
CRC
Action
Type
Setting Code
MY BUTTON-2
Set
RGB1
RGB2
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
C6 32
06 30
36 32
96 31
A6 33
56 33
66 31
06 3F
96 3E
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 36
01 36
01 36
01 36
01 36
01 36
01 36
01 36
01 36
00 00
04 00
03 00
05 00
02 00
01 00
06 00
10 00
11 00
M1-D
COMPONENT
S-VIDEO
VIDEO
MIU
INFORMATION
AUTO KEYSTONE
EXECUTE
MY MEMORY
PICTURE MODE
FILTER RESET
ACTIVE IRIS
e-SHOT
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
BE EF
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
06 00
66 3E
F6 3F
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
01 00
02 00
02 00
04 00
05 00
01 00
01 00
02 00
01 36
01 36
01 36
01 36
01 36
01 36
01 36
01 36
07 30
07 30
07 30
02 30
02 30
02 30
12 00
13 00
14 00
15 00
16 00
17 00
18 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
01 00
00 00
C6 3D
56 3C
A6 3C
36 3D
C6 38
F5 32
7C D2
1A D2
CB D3
83 D2
13 D3
B0 D2
VOLUME +
VOLUME -
Get
MAGNIFY
FREEZE
Get
Increment
Decrement
NORMAL
FREEZE
Set
Get
ꢀ9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
P8r9oje4c4tor
User’s Manual – Network Functions Section
This section is only intended to explain Network Functions.
• The information in this manual is subject to change without notice.
The manufacturer assumes no responsibility for any errors that may appear in
NOTE
•
this manual.
• The reproduction, transfer or copy of all or any part of this document is not
permitted without express written consent.
Trademark acknowledgment
• Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation.
All other trademarks are the properties of their respective owners.
Due to the continual evolution of software, this guide and the associated
programs will be continually updated. The upgrade will be provided free
and will be provided by Hitachi. Please check the following web addresses
to get the latest revisions.
http://www.hitachi.us/digitalmedia
or
http://www.hitachidigitalmedia
ꢀ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents
Contents
Caution …………………………………………………………………………………… 3
1. Main Functions ……………………………………………………………………… 5
1.1 Live Mode ………………………………………………………………………… 5
1.2 PC-LESS Presentation ………………………………………………………… 6
2. Equipment connection and network setting …………………………… 8
2.1 Required equipment preparation ……………………………………………… 8
2.2 Network connection using “One-Click-Communication”
function …………………………………………………………………………… 8
2.3 Manual network connection setting – Wired LAN - ……………………… 10
2.3.1 Equipments connection …………………………………………………… 10
2.3.2 Network settings …………………………………………………………… 11
2.3.3 “Internet Option” setting ………………………………………………… 14
2.3.4 Check connection…………………………………………………………… 15
2.4 Manual network connection setting – For wireless LAN - ……………… 16
2.4.1 Preparation for wireless LAN connection ……………………………… 16
2.4.2 Wireless LAN connection set up ………………………………………… 17
2.5 Configuring and Controlling the projector via a web browser…………… 19
2.5.1 Network Information ……………………………………………………… 22
2.5.2 Network Settings …………………………………………………………… 23
2.5.3 Port Settings ………………………………………………………………… 25
2.5.4 Mail Settings ………………………………………………………………… 26
2.5.5 Alert Settings ………………………………………………………………… 27
2.5.6 Schedule Settings…………………………………………………………… 32
2.5.7 Date/Time Settings ………………………………………………………… 34
2.5.8 Security Settings …………………………………………………………… 36
2.5.9 Projector Control …………………………………………………………… 38
2.5.10 Projector Status …………………………………………………………… 41
2.5.11 Network Restart …………………………………………………………… 41
2.5.12 Logoff………………………………………………………………………… 41
2.6 Utilize Web Remote Control …………………………………………………… 42
3. How to use Projector software – Basics - ………………………………… 44
3.1 How to use “MIU Live Viewer” ………………………………………………… 44
3.1.1 Install “MIU Live Viewer” ………………………………………………… 44
3.1.2 Software Installation Procedure ………………………………………… 45
3.1.3 Explanation of “MIU Live Viewer” ……………………………………… 46
3.1.4 Utilize “MIU Live Viewer” – Basic - ……………………………………… 50
3.2 Utilize “PC-LESS Presentation” – Basic - …………………………………… 52
4. Utilize projector – Advanced - ………………………………………………… 54
4.1 Utilize “MIU Live Viewer” – Advanced - ……………………………………… 54
4.1.1 Connect multiple PCs with one projector (Multiple PCs
connection) ………………………………………………………………… 54
4.2 Utilize “PC-LESS Presentation” – Advanced - ……………………………… 56
4.2.1 Thumbnail display ………………………………………………………… 57
4.2.2 Display in full screen ……………………………………………………… 59
4.2.3 Slide show …………………………………………………………………… 61
4.2.4 Directory display …………………………………………………………… 63
4.2.5 “PC-LESS Presentation” error message ……………………………… 66
4.3 Playlist ……………………………………………………………………………… 67
4.4 Failure & Warning Alerts via E-mail…………………………………………… 68
4.5 Projector management via SNMP……………………………………………… 70
4.6 Controlling the Projector via Scheduling …………………………………… 71
4.7 e-SHOT (Still Image Transfer) Display………………………………………… 74
4.8 Command Control via the Network …………………………………………… 75
5. Troubleshooting …………………………………………………………………… 80
6. Specifications ……………………………………………………………………… 82
7. Warranty and After-sales service …………………………………………… 83
ꢁ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Caution
Caution
[Restriction in terms of inserts or pulls memory card and wireless LAN card]
Do not pull out the memory card and the wireless card while the power is on. The
memory card can be pulled out only while the card access LED (Red) is off.
CAUTION
nTꢀhe accompanying 802.11g wireless LAN card uses the 2.4GHz radio frequency band. You
do not need a radio license to use this card, but you should be aware of the following:
lDꢀO NOT USE NEAR THE FOLLOWING!
• Microwave ovens
• Industrial, scientific or medical devices
• Designated low power radio stations
• Premises radio stations
Using the wireless LAN card near the above may result in radio interference, which in
turn may result in a decrease in communication speed and even a complete loss of
communication.
lDꢀepending on the location where you attempt to use the wireless LAN card, there may be
interference with the radio waves, which may result in a decrease in communication speed
and even a complete loss of communication. In particular, please be aware that using the
wireless LAN card in locations where there is reinforced steel, other metals and concrete
may interfere with radio communication.
lAꢀvailable Channels
The wireless LAN card uses the 2.4GHz radio frequency band, but depending on the
country or region you are in, you might be limited to the channels you can use. Please
refer to the following table for confirming where and with what channels you may use the
accompanying 802.11g wireless LAN card. Please consult with your dealer for countries
not included in the table.
Country or Region
Japan
Available Channel
ꢀ to ꢀꢀ
USA
ꢀ to ꢀꢀ
Taiwan
ꢀ to ꢀꢀ
Canada
ꢀ to ꢀꢀ
UK, Spain, Germany, Italy, Austria, Switzerland,
Belgium, Sweden, Netherlands, Portugal,
Denmark, Finland, Greece, Norway, France,
Ireland, Luxembourg, Iceland
ꢀ to ꢀꢀ
lYꢀou may not bring the wireless LAN card into countries not listed above as there is
a possibility that use of the wireless LAN card in those countries could lead to an
infringement of established radio laws.
ꢂ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. Main functions
1. Main functions
1.1 Live Mode (Project images from PC
)
The main function of MIU (Multi Information processing Unit) is the Live Mode.
On Live Mode, the projector displays the screen appearing on the PC via network,
supported by “MIU Live Viewer” (Fig.1.1.a).
The “MIU Live Viewer” captures PC screen image using dedicated firmware
“MIU Live Viewer” and sends it to projector through wired LAN or wireless LAN
connection. (Refer to section 3 and 5 in detail.)
Fig. 1.1.a “MIU Live Viewer” outlines (through wireless LAN connection)
Fig. 1.1.b “MIU Live Viewer”
One projector can be connected with up to 4 PCs using “MIU Live Viewer”.
(Refer to section 4.1 in detail.)
ꢃ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. Main functions
1.2 PC-LESS Presentation
(Display the images stored in SD card/USB memory.)
Other main function is “PC-LESS Presentation”. (Fig. 1.2.a) “PC-LESS
Presentation” has 4 kinds of display modes.
1) Thumbnail display: Display many stored images in SD card and USB memory
at once. (From now on, it is called “memory card” as SD card and USB memory
combined.)
2) Display in full screen: Display 1 picture or moving picture in full screen.
3) Slide show: Switch images with set intervals.
4) Directory display: Display directories and files stored in memory card as listed.
[Supported memory cards]
-
-
SD card
USB memory (USB memory type, USB Hard Disk and USB card
reader type)
ꢀ6*7/$0#+.ꢀ=ꢀ5&ꢀ?
ꢀ2%ꢁ.'55
ꢀ24'5'06#6+10
ꢀ/'07
㪈
㪋
㪉
㪌
㪊
㪍
+OCIGꢁꢂ
+OCIGꢁꢈ
+OCIGꢁꢉ
+OCIGꢁꢂꢅ
+OCIGꢁꢌ
+OCIGꢁꢊ
+OCIGꢁꢋ
+OCIGꢁꢂꢂ
+OCIGꢁꢎ
+OCIGꢁꢍ
+OCIGꢁꢇ
+OCIGꢁꢂꢌ
ꢀ5.+&'ꢀ5*19
ꢀ56#46ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢆꢀꢂ
ꢀ5612ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢆꢀꢇꢇꢇ
ꢀ+06'48#.ꢀꢀꢂꢅ5
㪎
㪏
㪐
ꢀ/1&'
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ10'ꢀ6+/'
㪈㪇
㪈㪈
㪈㪉
ꢀ2.#;
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢃꢀꢄ;'5
'06'4
Fig. 1.2.a “PC-LESS Presentation” outlines
“PC-LESS Presentation” can be controlled via keypad on the Projector or IR
Remote (refer 4.2 Utilize PC-LESS Presentation -Advanced).
You can also use “Remote Control” as shown in fig. 1.2.b, which enables selecting
images, switching pages and switching display modes. “Remote Control” also
switches mode between “MIU Live Viewer” and “PC-LESS Presentation”.
ꢄ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. Main functions
1.2 PC-LESS Presentation
(Display the images stored in SD card/USB memory.) (Continued)
Fig. 1.2.b Remote Control
NOTE • There are following limitations for file name and directory name in
PC-LESS Presentation.
(1) The projector's language setting is Japanese.
Only alpha-numeric characters and Japanese are supported.
(2) The projector's language setting is not Japanese.
Only alpha-numeric characters and Latin-1 characters are supported.
• Data cannot be read correctly depending on the type of USB hard disk, USB
memory and USB card reader.
• When your USB hard disk can use a DC power supply adapter, please use it.
ꢅ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Equipment connection and network setting
2. Equipment connection and network setting
2.1 Required equipment preparation
Followings are required for 1 projector and 1 PC connection. Multiple PC
connection is described in section 4.1.
Projector: 1 unit
PC: 1 set (“MIU Live Viewer” installation is required for “MIU Live Viewer” usage.)
IEEE802.g wireless LAN equipment is required.
Depending on the type of wireless LAN card and PC you are using, the
projector may not be able to communicate properly with your PC, even
if the PC you are using is equipped with built-in wireless LAN function.
To eliminate communication problems, please procure a Wi-Fi certified
wireless LAN card.
LAN cable (in case of wired connection): 1 piece * 1
SD Wireless Network Card (in case of wireless connection): 1 unit * 2
Memory card (in case of “PC-LESS Presentation” usage): 1 piece
* 1: When a projector and a PC are connected, use CAT-5 LAN cable.
* 2: Access point is required when wireless LAN connection is used as
Infrastructure mode.
2.2 Network connection using “One-Click-Communication”
function
This section explains how to connect network using “One-Click-Communication”
function. This function makes PC and projector network connection very easy
without complicated settings like IP address and SSID.
* This function cannot be used when multiple PCs or multiple projectors are
connected.
* The system of Windows2000 Professional Service Pack 4 or Windows XP and
the administrator authority are required to use “One-Click-Communication”
function. (Administrator authority)
* This function might not work depending on your used wireless LAN driver.
If so, setup the connection manually. ( 10, 16 and refer to the User Manuals for
your PC and wireless equipment.)
[Wired LAN connection]
1) When projector network settings such as IP address and subnet mask are
changed, need to return to the projector factory default Network settings.
qPꢀ ress the menu button on remote control or the ▲/◄/►/▼ button on keypad.
Then OSD menu will be displayed. If Easy Menu is displayed, change the
menu to Advanced menu.
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Equipment connection and network setting
2.2 Network connection using “One-Click-Communication” function
(Continued)
wSelect the MIU menu by using ▲/▼ button.
ꢀꢀꢀ
ꢀ/'07ꢀ=4)$ꢁ?
ꢂ5'.'%6
ꢀ2+%674'
ꢀ+/#)'
ꢀ+0276
.+8'ꢀ/1&'
2%ꢃ.'55ꢀ24'5'06#6+10
5'672
Gꢃ5*16
ꢀ5'672
+0(14/#6+10
5'48+%'
ꢀ5%4''0
ꢀ126+10
ꢀ/+7
ꢀ'#5;ꢀ/'07
ePress the Reset key on remote control. Then Reset Menu will be displayed.
/+7
4'5'6
%#0%'.
rPress the ▲ button to reset the Network settings.
NOTE • SSID, WEP KEY will be set to factory default settings.
• If you like to set these items, please set again from WEB ( 19).
2) Connect PC and projector using LAN cable to make it ready for communication.
* In case of connecting with existing network, contact your network administrator.
3) Start up “MIU Live Viewer”. Window appears in fig. 2.2.a. (Refer to section 3.1
how to use “MIU Live Viewer”.)
Fig. 2.2.a “MIU Live Viewer” initial window
ꢆ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Equipment connection and network setting
2.2 Network connection using “One-Click-Communication” function
(Continued)
4) Click “One-Click” button in fig. 2.2.a. Projector is found. Then capture start
button is pushed and real time display is started automatically.
[Wireless LAN connection]
1) When projector network settings such as IP address and subnet mask are
changed, need to return to the projector factory default settings. ( 9)
2) In case 802.11b/g wireless LAN device is built-in the PC, make the LAN valid
and other network connections invalid. If wireless LAN device is not built in the
PC, connect 802.11b/g wireless LAN device and install device driver to the PC.
(Refer to the user guide for wireless LAN device details.)
3) Start up “MIU Live Viewer”, then the window appears (shown in fig. 2.2.a).
4) Click “One-Click” button as shown in fig. 2.2.a. Then projector will be found
and the capture start button is activated then real time display is started
automatically.
2.3 Manual network connection setting – Wired LAN -
When you need to set the original IP address and SSID other than factory default
settings, need to set up network connection manually.
This section explains how to set up network connection manually.
2.3.1. Equipments connection
At first, connecting projector and PC with wired LAN connection to check PC
setting and connection. Next section explains PC settings.
Connecting projector with network using LAN cable, and then set it ready to
communicate with PC.
* Connecting with existing network, contact network administrator.
At last, turn on the projector. This is the end of Equipments connection.
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Equipment connection and network setting
2.3 Manual network connection setting – In case of wired LAN - (Continued)
2.3.2. Network settings
This is the explanation of network connection settings for Windows XP and
Internet Explorer.
1) Log on to Windows XP as administrator authority. (*)
2) Open “Control Panel” from “Start” menu.
3) Open “Network and Internet Connections” in “Control Panel”. (Fig. 2.3.2.a)
* Administrator authority is the account, which can access to all functions.
Fig. 2.3.2.a “Network and Internet Connections” window
4) Open “Network Connections”. (Fig. 2.3.2.b)
Fig. 2.3.2.b “Network Connections” window
ꢀꢀ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Equipment connection and network setting
2.3 Manual network connection setting – In case of wired LAN - (Continued)
5) When more than 2 usable network devices exist, make only one device “valid”
that you want to use and the rest of devices “invalid”. (In this case, “Local Area
Connection” is selected.)
6) Open “Local Area Connection Properties” window you use for network device.
(Fig. 2.3.2.c)
Fig. 2.3.2.c “Local Area Connection Properties” window
7) Set used protocol as “TCP/IP” and open “Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties”
window.
Fig. 2.3.2.d “Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties” window
8) Set IP address, subnet mask and default gateway for PC.
ꢀꢁ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Equipment connection and network setting
2.3 Manual network connection setting – In case of wired LAN - (Continued)
[About IP address]
Network address portion of PC IP address should be common with projector’s
one but the PC total IP address should not be overlapped with other networked
equipments.
For example, projector initial settings are as follows.
IP address: 192.168.1.10
Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
Therefore, specify PC IP address as follows.
IP address: 192.168.1.xxx (xxx shows decimal number.)
Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
Select from 1 to 254 for “xxx” not duplicating with any other equipments. In this
case, projector has “192.168.1.10” IP address, specify from 1 to 254 except 10 for
PC.
Projector IP address can be changed by using configuration utility. (Refer to
section 2.5.)
When DHCP server exists in network, it is possible to set using IP address, which
is automatically assigned to projector.
If projector and PC exist in the same network (i.e. network address is common),
default gateway can be blank.
* DHCP is abbreviation for “Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol” and the function
to provide necessary setting for network like IP address from server to client.
Server that has DHCP function is called DHCP server.
* When projector and PC exist in different networks, default gateway setting is
necessary. Contact network administrator in detail.
ꢀꢂ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Equipment connection and network setting
2.3 Manual network connection setting – In case of wired LAN - (Continued)
2.3.3 “Internet Option” setting
1) Click “Internet Options” in “Network and Internet Connections” window
(Fig. 2.3.3.a) to open “Internet Properties” window. (Fig. 2.3.3.b)
Click
Fig. 2.3.3.a “Network and Internet Connections” window
Click
Fig. 2.3.3.b “Internet Properties” window
2) Click “Connections” tab and then click “LAN settings” button to open “Local
Area Network (LAN) settings”. (Fig. 2.3.3.c)
14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Equipment connection and network setting
2.3 Manual network connection setting – In case of wired LAN - (Continued)
Fig. 2.3.3.c “Local Area Network (LAN) Settings” window
3) Uncheck all boxes in “Local Area Network (LAN) Settings” window. (Fig. 2.3.3.c)
2.3.4 Check connection
Check PC and projector are connected properly here. If it is not connected, check
cable connections and settings are properly or not.
1) Start browser in PC and specify following URL, then click “Go” button.
URL: http://(Projector IP address) /
For example, if projector IP address is 192.168.1.10, specify
URL: http://192.168.1.10/
2) After enter your ID and password, if Fig. 2.3.4 appears, it succeeds.
Fig. 2.3.4 “Logon Menu”
ꢀꢃ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Equipment connection and network setting
2.4 Manual network connection setting – For wireless LAN
By installing SD-Link11g card, PC and wireless LAN are able to communicate in
both Ad-Hoc and Infrastructure modes.
How to set up wireless LAN connection manually.
2.4.1 Preparation for wireless LAN connection
Fig. 2.4.1.a Without access point communication (Ad-Hoc)
Fig. 2.4.1.b With access point communication (Infrastructure)
* Ad-Hoc is one of the wireless LAN communication methods without having
access point to communicate.
* Infrastructure is one of the wireless LAN communication methods with having
access point to communicate. If certain quantities of equipments are used, this
mode is efficiently.
If communicating with existing network, contact your network administrator.
First, insert the SD wireless network card into SD Card slot ( Inserting an SD card
and USB memory of the User's Manual - Operating Guide).
Then, make PC ready for wireless communication.
In case 802.11b/g wireless LAN device is built-in the PC, make it valid and make
other network connections invalid. If wireless LAN device is not built-in the PC,
connect 802.11b/g wireless LAN device and install device driver. (Refer to the
user guide for PC and wireless LAN device for detail.)
ꢀꢄ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Equipment connection and network setting
2.4 Manual network connection setting – For wireless LAN (Continued)
2.4.2 Wireless LAN connection set up
Using wireless LAN utility for Windows XP standard.
Wireless LAN initial settings for the projector is as follows.
Connection Control
SSID
Channel
: Ad-Hoc
: wireless
: 1ch
Encryption rating
: None
Communication speed: AUTO
IP address
: 192.168.1.10
* You can change these settings as you want. Use configuration utility or menu to
change. (Refer to section 2.5)
1) Open ”Network Connections”. (Fig. 2.4.2.a)
Fig. 2.4.2.a “Network Connections”
2) Make wireless network connection “Valid” and other network devices “Invalid”.
3) Open “Wireless Network Connection Properties”. (Fig. 2.4.2.b)
Fig. 2.4.2.b “Wireless Network Connection Properties” window (1)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ꢀꢅ
2. Equipment connection and network setting
2.4 Manual network connection setting – For wireless LAN (Continued)
4) Set used protocol as “TCP/IP” and open TCP/IP property. Set IP address and
other settings as same as wired LAN connection set up. ( 12)
5) Open “Wireless Networks” tab. (Fig. 2.4.2.c)
Fig. 2.4.2.c “Wireless Network Connection Properties” window (2)
6) Add check mark for “Use Windows to configure my wireless network settings”
in “Wireless Network Connection Properties” window.
7) Click “Add” button in “Preferred networks” section in “Wireless Network
Connection Properties” window (Fig. 2.4.2.c) to open “Wireless Network
Properties” window. (Fig. 2.4.2.d)
Fig. 2.4.2.d “Wireless network Properties” window
18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Equipment connection and network setting
2.4 Manual network connection setting – For wireless LAN (Continued)
8) Set each item as follows.
Network name (SSID): wireless
Data encryption: Invalid (Default setting is invalid.)
* This explanation meets the projector default setting. If access point is used or
data encryption is used, if needs to change settings properly. Refer to PC or
wireless LAN device user guide for detailed information.
* If using the existing network via access point, contact your network administrator.
2.5 Configuring and controlling the projector via a web browser
You can adjust or control the projector via a network from a web browser on a PC
that is connected to the same network.
NOTE • Internet Explorer 5.5 or higher are required.
• If JavaScript is disabled in your web browser configuration, you must enable
JavaScript in order to use the projector web pages properly. See the Help files
for your web browser for details on how to enable JavaScript.
• If no operations are performed via a web browser for approx. 50 seconds the
system will automatically log off. Please Re-log on to continue operations via a
web browser.
• After you logon, a small, blank window will appear behind the main operation
window. Please do not close this small, blank window. If this window is closed,
the system will automatically log off after certain period of time even if an
operation is being performed.
The small, blank window will close when the main operation window is closed.
• The small, blank window may be considered a pop-up and be blocked if you
are using Windows XP Service Pack 2, or using other security software.
If Service Pack 2 blocks the window the following message will appear:
"Pop-up blocked. To see this pop-up or additional options click here..."
Please select "Temporarily Allow Pop-ups" or "Always Allow Pop-ups From This
Site..." to allow the window to open.
• It is recommended that all web browser updates be installed. It is especially
recommended that all users running Internet Explorer on a Microsoft Windows
version prior to Windows XP Service Pack 2 install security update Q832894
(MS04-004) or the web browser interface may not be displayed correctly.
And when using an older version of Internet Explorer, during operations the
browser will log out after 50 seconds.
ꢀꢆ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Equipment connection and network setting
2.5 Configuring and controlling the projector via a web browser (Continued)
When configuring or controlling the projector via a web browser, an ID and
password are required. There are two types of IDs, Administrator IDs and User
IDs. The following chart describes the differences between user and administrator
IDs.
Item
Description
Administrator ID User ID
Displays the projector’s current
network configuration settings.
Network Information
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
Displays and configures network
settings.
Network Settings
Port Settings
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Displays and configures
communication port settings.
Displays and configures e-mail
addressing settings.
Mail Settings
Displays and configures failure &
warning alerts.
Alert Settings
Displays and configures schedule
settings.
Schedule Settings
Date/Time Settings
Security Settings
Displays and configures the date and
time settings.
Displays and configures passwords
and other security settings.
Projector Control
Controls the projector.
√
√
√
√
Remote Control
Controls the projector like IR remote.
Displays and configures the current
projector status.
Projector Status
√
√
√
Restarts the projector’s network
connection.
Network Restart
N/A
Below are the factory default settings for administrator IDs, user IDs and
passwords.
Item
Administrator ID
User ID
ID
Password
<blank>
Administrator
User
<blank>
20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Equipment connection and network setting
2.5 Configuring and controlling the projector via a web browser (Continued)
Refer to the following for configuring or controlling the projector via a web browser.
Example: If the IP address of the projector is set to 192.168.1.10:
1) Enter
[http://192.168.1.10/] into the address
bar of the web browser and the screen
in Fig. 2.5.a will be displayed.
2) Enter your ID and password and click
[Logon].
Fig. 2.5.a "Logon Menu"
If the logon is successful either the Fig.2.5.b or Fig.2.5.c screen will be displayed.
Fig. 2.5.b "Logon with administrator ID"
Fig. 2.5.c "Logon with user ID"
3) Click the desired operation or configuration item on the main menu located on
the left-hand side of the screen (Fig. 2.5.b or Fig. 2.5.c).
ꢁꢀ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Equipment connection and network setting
2.5 Configuring and controlling the projector via a web browser (Continued)
2.5.1 Network Information
All screen images displayed in this manual are
screens of a logon using an administrator ID.
Any administrator only functions will not be
displayed when using a user ID. Refer to the
descriptions in each table.
Displays the projector’s current network configuration settings.
Item
Description
Displays the DHCP configuration settings.
Displays the current IP address.
DHCP
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Default Gateway
MAC Ethernet
MAC Wireless
Displays the Subnet Mask.
Displays the Default Gateway.
Displays the Ethernet MAC address.
Displays the Wireless LAN MAC address.
Displays the network firmware time stamp. This information is only
displayed when logged on using an administrator ID.
Firmware Date
Displays the network firmware version number. This information is
only displayed when logged on using an administrator ID.
Firmware Version
Wireless CH
Displays wireless LAN default channel. (Not Supported)
Displays SD card slot status. (Not Supported)
SD Card Status
Displays wireless LAN connection speed. (Not Supported)
NOTE • When you select wireless mode "AD-HOC", speed
value is not true until the projector connect wireless LAN.
Wireless Speed
USB Status
USB Power
Displays USB-A port status. (Not Supported)
Displays USB-A port supplying power or not. (Not Supported)
ꢁꢁ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Equipment connection and network setting
2.5 Configuring and controlling the projector via a web browser (Continued)
2.5.2 Network Settings
Displays and configures network settings.
Item
NETWORK MODE
IP Configuration
DHCP ON
Description
Select Network mode "wired" or "wireless".
Configures network settings.
Enables DHCP.
DHCP OFF
Disables DHCP.
IP Address
Configures the IP address when DHCP is disabled.
Configures the Subnet Mask when DHCP is disabled.
Configures the Default Gateway when DHCP is disabled.
Configures the Projector name.
Subnet Mask
Default Gateway
Projector Name
SysLocation (SNMP)
Configures the location to be referred to when using SNMP.
Configures the contact information to be referred to when
using SNMP.
SysContact (SNMP)
DNS Server Address
Configures the DNS Server address.
ꢁꢂ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Equipment connection and network setting
2.5 Configuring and controlling the projector via a web browser (Continued)
2.5.2 Network Settings (Continued)
Item
Wireless Mode
Mode
Description
Select "AD-HOC" or "Infrastructure".
Select using channel between "1" and "11".
NOTE • Depending on the country where you are
the channels may vary. In addition, depending on the
country or region where you are may be required to use
a wireless LAN card that confirm to the standards in the
respective country or region.
CH
(Communication
channel)
Speed
(Communication speed)
Select communication speed.
Select data encryption method.
Encryption
Input WEP key, which has same length defined by WEP.
When "64bit" or "128bit" is selected, input 10 characters or
26 characters respectively. Only numbers from "0" to "9" and
alphabets from "a" to "f" can be used.
WEP Key
Input WPA Passphrase. Available number of input characters
is 8 to 63. Only alphabets, numbers and following symbols
can be used.
WPA Passphrase
SSID
!"#$%&'()*+,-./[¥]^_`{|}~
Set SSID. Maximum number of input characters is 32. Only
alphabets, numbers and following symbols can be used.
!"#$%&'()*+,-./[¥]^_`{|}~
Click the [Apply] button to save the settings.
NOTE • The new configuration settings are activated after restarting the
network connection. When the configuration settings are changed, you must
restart the network connection. You can restart the network connection by
clicking [Network Restart] on the main menu.
• If you connect the projector to an existing network, consult a network
administrator before setting server addresses.
24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Equipment connection and network setting
2.5 Configuring and controlling the projector via a web browser (Continued)
2.5.3 Port Settings
Displays and configures communication port settings.
Item
Description
Network Control Port1
(Port:23)
Configures command control port 1 (Port:23).
Click the [Enable] check box to use port 23.
Port open
Click the [Enable] check box when authentication is required
for this port.
Authentication
Network Control Port2
(Port:9715)
Configures command control port 2 (Port:9715).
Port open
Click the [Enable] check box to use port 9715.
Click the [Enable] check box when authentication is required
for this port.
Authentication
SNMP Port
Port open
Configures the SNMP port.
Click the [Enable] check box to use SNMP.
Configures the destination of the SNMP Trap in IP format.
Configures the SMTP port.
Trap address
SMTP Port
Port open
Click the [Enable] check box to use the e-mail function.
Click the [Apply] button to save the settings.
NOTE • The new configuration settings are activated after restarting the
network connection. The network connection must be restarted when the
configuration settings are changed. The network connection can be restarted
using [Network Restart] on the main menu.
ꢁꢃ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Equipment connection and network setting
2.5 Configuring and controlling the projector via a web browser (Continued)
2.5.4 Mail Settings
Displays and configures e-mail addressing settings.
Item
Description
Click the [Enable] check box to use the e-mail function.
Configure the conditions for sending email under [Alert
Settings].
Send Mail
SMTP Server IP Address Configures the address of the mail server in IP format.
Configures the sender e-mail address.
The length of the sender e-mail address can be up to 255
Sender E-mail address
alphanumeric characters.
Configures the e-mail address of up to five recipients. You
can also specify [TO] or [CC] for each address. The length of
the recipient e-mail address can be up to 255 alphanumeric
characters.
Recipient E-mail address
Click the [Apply] button to save the settings.
NOTE • You can confirm whether the mail settings work correctly using the
[Send Test Mail] button.
• If you connect the projector to an existing network, consult a network
administrator before setting server addresses.
ꢁꢄ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Equipment connection and network setting
2.5 Configuring and controlling the projector via a web browser (Continued)
2.5.5 Alert Settings
Displays and configures failure & warning alerts.
Item
Cover Error
Description
Configures Cover Error alert settings.
Click the [Enable] check box to enable SNMP Trap alerts for
this item.
SNMP Trap
Send Mail
Click the [Enable] check box to enable e-mail alerts for this
item.
Configures the subject line of the e-mail to be sent.
The length of the subject line can be up to 255 alphanumeric
characters.
Mail Subject
Configures the text of the e-mail to be sent.
The length of the text can be up to 1024 alphanumeric
characters.
Mail Text
Fan Error
Configures Fan Error alert settings.
Click the [Enable] check box to enable SNMP Trap alerts for
this item.
SNMP Trap
Send Mail
Click the [Enable] check box to enable e-mail alerts for this
item.
Configures the subject line of the e-mail to be sent.
The length of the subject line can be up to 255 alphanumeric
characters.
Mail Subject
Configures the text of the e- mail to be sent.
The length of the text can be up to 1024 alphanumeric
characters.
Mail Text
ꢁꢅ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Equipment connection and network setting
2.5 Configuring and controlling the projector via a web browser (Continued)
2.5.5 Alert Settings (Continued)
Item
Lamp Error
Description
Configures Lamp Error alert settings.
Click the [Enable] check box to enable SNMP Trap alerts for
this item.
SNMP Trap
Send Mail
Click the [Enable] check box to enable e-mail alerts for this
item.
Configures the subject line of the e-mail to be sent.
The length of the subject line can be up to 255 alphanumeric
characters.
Mail Subject
Configures the text of the e-mail to be sent.
The length of the text can be up to 1024 alphanumeric
characters.
Mail Text
Temp Error
Configures Temp Error alert settings.
Click the [Enable] check box to enable SNMP Trap alerts for
this item.
SNMP Trap
Send Mail
Click the [Enable] check box to enable e-mail alerts for this
item.
Configures the subject line of the e-mail to be sent.
The length of the subject line can be up to 255 alphanumeric
characters.
Mail Subject
Configures the text of the e-mail to be sent.
The length of the text can be up to 1024 alphanumeric
characters.
Mail Text
Air Flow Error
SNMP Trap
Configures Air Flow Error alert settings.
Click the [Enable] check box to enable SNMP Trap alerts for
this item.
Click the [Enable] check box to enable e-mail alerts for this
item.
Send Mail
Configures the subject line of the e-mail to be sent.
The length of the subject line can be up to 255 alphanumeric
characters.
Mail Subject
Configures the text of the e-mail to be sent.
The length of the text can be up to 1024 alphanumeric
characters.
Mail Text
28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Equipment connection and network setting
2.5 Configuring and controlling the projector via a web browser (Continued)
2.5.5 Alert Settings (Continued)
Item
Description
Lamp Time Error
Configures Lamp Time Error alert settings.
Click the [Enable] check box to enable SNMP Trap alerts for
this item.
SNMP Trap
Send Mail
Click the [Enable] check box to enable e-mail alerts for this
item.
Configures the subject line of the e-mail to be sent.
The length of the subject line can be up to 255 alphanumeric
characters.
Mail Subject
Configures the text of the e-mail to be sent.
The length of the text can be up to 1024 alphanumeric
characters.
Mail Text
Cool Error
SNMP Trap
Configures Cool Error alert settings.
Click the [Enable] check box to enable SNMP Trap alerts for
this item.
Click the [Enable] check box to enable e-mail alerts for this
item.
Send Mail
Configures the subject line of the e-mail to be sent.
The length of the subject line can be up to 255 alphanumeric
characters.
Mail Subject
Configures the text of the e-mail to be sent.
The length of the text can be up to 1024 alphanumeric
characters.
Mail Text
Filter Error
SNMP Trap
Configures Filter Error alert settings.
Click the [Enable] check box to enable SNMP Trap alerts for
this item.
Click the [Enable] check box to enable e-mail alerts for this
item.
Send Mail
Configures the subject line of the e-mail to be sent.
The length of the subject line can be up to 255 alphanumeric
characters.
Mail Subject
Configures the text of the e-mail to be sent.
The length of the text can be up to 1024 alphanumeric
characters.
Mail Text
ꢁꢆ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Equipment connection and network setting
2.5 Configuring and controlling the projector via a web browser (Continued)
2.5.5 Alert Settings (Continued)
Item
Other Error
Description
Configures Other Error alert settings.
Click the [Enable] check box to enable SNMP Trap alerts for
this item.
SNMP Trap
Send Mail
Click the [Enable] check box to enable e-mail alerts for this
item.
Configures the subject line of the e-mail to be sent.
The length of the subject line can be up to 255 alphanumeric
characters.
Mail Subject
Configures the text of the e-mail to be sent.
The length of the text can be up to 1024 alphanumeric
characters.
Mail Text
Schedule Execution Error Configures Schedule Execution Error alert settings.
Click the [Enable] check box to enable SNMP Trap alerts for
this item.
SNMP Trap
Click the [Enable] check box to enable e-mail alerts for this
item.
Send Mail
Configures the subject line of the e-mail to be sent.
The length of the subject line can be up to 255 alphanumeric
Mail Subject
characters.
Configures the text of the e-mail to be sent.
The length of the text can be up to 1024 alphanumeric
characters.
Mail Text
Lamp Time Alarm
Alarm Time
Configures Lamp Time Alarm alert settings.
Configures the lamp time to alert.
Click the [Enable] check box to enable SNMP Trap alerts for
this item.
SNMP Trap
Send Mail
Click the [Enable] check box to enable e-mail alerts for this
item.
Configures the subject line of the e-mail to be sent.
The length of the subject line can be up to 255 alphanumeric
characters.
Mail Subject
Configures the text of the e-mail to be sent.
The length of the text can be up to 1024 alphanumeric
characters.
Mail Text
30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Equipment connection and network setting
2.5 Configuring and controlling the projector via a web browser (Continued)
2.5.5 Alert Settings (Continued)
Item
Filter Time Alarm
Alarm Time
Description
Configures Filter Time Alarm alert settings.
Configures the filter time to alert.
Click the [Enable] check box to enable SNMP Trap alerts for
this item.
SNMP Trap
Send Mail
Click the [Enable] check box to enable e-mail alerts for this
item.
Configures the subject line of the e-mail to be sent.
The length of the subject line can be up to 255 alphanumeric
characters.
Mail Subject
Configures the text of the e-mail to be sent.
The length of the text can be up to 1024 alphanumeric characters.
Mail Text
Transition Detector Alarm Configures Transition Detector Alarm alert settings.
Click the [Enable] check box to enable SNMP Trap alerts for
this item.
SNMP Trap
Click the [Enable] check box to enable e-mail alerts for this
item.
Send Mail
Configures the subject line of the e-mail to be sent.
The length of the subject line can be up to 255 alphanumeric
Mail Subject
characters.
Configures the text of the e-mail to be sent.
The length of the text can be up to 1024 alphanumeric characters.
Mail Text
“CHANGE THE LAMP” is Configures alert settings for when “CHANGE THE LAMP” is
displayed
displayed.
Click the [Enable] check box to enable SNMP Trap alerts for
this item.
SNMP Trap
Send Mail
Click the [Enable] check box to enable e-mail alerts for this item.
Configures the subject line of the e-mail to be sent.
The length of the subject line can be up to 255 alphanumeric
characters.
Mail Subject
Configures the text of the e-mail to be sent.
The length of the text can be up to 1024 alphanumeric characters.
Mail Text
Cold Start
Configures Cold Start alert settings.
Click the [Enable] check box to enable SNMP Trap alerts for
this item.
SNMP Trap
Authentication Failure
SNMP Trap
Configures Authentication Failure alert settings.
Click the [Enable] check box to enable SNMP Trap alerts for
this item.
ꢂꢀ
Click the [ApDpolyw]nlobaudttfroonmtWowswa.Svoemtahneuaslse.ctotimn.gAsll.Manuals Search And Download.
2. Equipment connection and network setting
2.5 Configuring and controlling the projector via a web browser (Continued)
2.5.6 Schedule Settings
Displays and configures schedule settings.
Item
Description
Configures the daily schedule.
Daily
Schedule
Schedule List
Sunday
Click the [Enable] check box to enable daily scheduling.
Displays the current daily schedule.
Configures the Sunday schedule.
Schedule
Click the [Enable] check box to enable Sunday scheduling.
Displays the current Sunday schedule.
Schedule List
Monday
Configures the Monday schedule.
Schedule
Click the [Enable] check box to enable Monday scheduling.
Displays the current Monday schedule.
Schedule List
Tuesday
Configures the Tuesday schedule.
Schedule
Click the [Enable] check box to enable Tuesday scheduling.
Displays the current Tuesday schedule.
Schedule List
Wednesday
Configures the Wednesday schedule.
Schedule
Click the [Enable] check box to enable Wednesday scheduling.
Displays the current Wednesday schedule.
Configures the Thursday schedule.
Schedule List
Thursday
Schedule
Click the [Enable] check box to enable Thursday scheduling.
Displays the current Thursday schedule.
Schedule List
Friday
Configures the Friday schedule.
Schedule
Click the [Enable] check box to enable Friday scheduling.
Displays the current Friday schedule.
Schedule List
Saturday
Configures the Saturday schedule.
Schedule
Click the [Enable] check box to enable Saturday scheduling.
Displays the current Saturday schedule.
Schedule List
ꢂꢁ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Equipment connection and network setting
2.5 Configuring and controlling the projector via a web browser (Continued)
2.5.6 Schedule Setting (Continued)
Item
Description
Specific date No1
Configures the specific date (No.1) schedule.
Click the [Enable] check box to enable specific date (No.1)
scheduling.
Schedule
Month/Day
Schedule List
Configures the Month and date.
Displays the current specific date (No.1) schedule.
Configures the specific date (No.2) schedule.
Specific date No.2
Click the [Enable] check box to enable specific date (No.2)
scheduling.
Schedule
Month/Day
Schedule List
Configures the Month and date.
Displays the current specific date (No.2) schedule.
Configures the specific date (No.3) schedule.
Specific date No.3
Click the [Enable] check box to enable specific date (No.3)
scheduling.
Schedule
Month/Day
Schedule List
Configures the Month and date.
Displays the current specific date (No.3) schedule.
Configures the specific date (No.4) schedule.
Specific date No.4
Click the [Enable] check box to enable specific date (No.4)
scheduling.
Schedule
Month/Day
Schedule List
Configures the Month and date.
Displays the current specific date (No.4) schedule.
Configures the specific date (No.5) schedule.
Specific date No.5
Click the [Enable] check box to enable specific date (No.5)
scheduling.
Schedule
Month/Day
Set the Month and date.
Schedule List
Displays the current specific date (No.5) schedule.
Click the [Apply] button to save the settings.
ꢂꢂ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Equipment connection and network setting
2.5 Configuring and controlling the projector via a web browser (Continued)
2.5.6 Schedule Setting (Continued)
To add additional functions and events click the [Add] button and set the following
items.
Item
Description
Time
Configures the time to execute commands.
Configures the commands to be executed.
Configures the parameters for power control.
Command
Power Parameter
Input Source
Parameter
Configures the parameters for input switching.
Display Image
Parameter
Configures the parameters for display of transfer image data.
Click the [Register] button to add new commands to the Schedule List.
Click the [Delete] button to delete commands from the Schedule List.
2.5.7 Date/Time Settings
Displays and configures the date and time settings.
Item
Current Date
Description
Configures the current date in Year/Month/Day format.
Configures the current time in Hour:Minute:Second format.
Current Time
34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Equipment connection and network setting
2.5 Configuring and controlling the projector via a web browser (Continued)
2.5.7 Date/Time Settings (Continued)
Item
Description
Click the [ON] check box to enable daylight savings time and
set the following items.
Daylight Savings Time
Start
Configures the date and time daylight savings time begins.
Configures the month daylight savings time begins (1~12).
Month
Configures the week of the month daylight savings time
begins (First, 2, 3, 4, Last).
Week
Day
Configures the day of the week daylight savings time begins
(Sun, Mon, Tue, Wed, Thu, Fri, Sat).
Hour
Minute
End
Configures the hour daylight savings time begins (0 ~ 23).
Configures the minute daylight savings time begins (0 ~ 59).
Configures the date and time daylight savings time ends.
Configures the month daylight savings time ends (1 ~ 12).
Month
Configures the week of the month daylight savings time ends
(First, 2, 3, 4, Last).
Week
Day
Configures the day of the week daylight savings time ends
(Sun, Mon, Tue, Wed, Thu, Fri, Sat).
Hour
Configures the hour daylight savings time ends (0 ~ 23).
Configures the minute daylight savings time ends (0 ~ 59).
Minute
Configures the time difference (hours:minutes).
Set the same time difference as the one set on your PC. If
unsure, consult your network administrator.
Time difference
Click the [ON] check box to retrieve Date and Time
information from the SNTP server and set the following items.
SNTP
SNTP Server IP Address Configures the SNTP server address in IP format.
Configures the interval at which to retrieve Date and Time
information from the SNTP server. (hours:minutes).
Cycle
Click the [Apply] button to save the settings.
NOTE • The new configuration settings are activated after restarting the network connection.
The network connection must be restarted when the configuration settings are changed, The
network connection can be restarted using [Network Restart] on the main menu.
•
If you connect the projector to an existing network, consult a network administrator before setting server addresses.
• To enable the SNTP function, the time difference must be set.
• The projector will retrieve DATE and TIME information from the timeserver
and override time settings when SNTP is enabled.
•
The Internal Clock’s time may not remain accurate. Using SNTP is recommended to maintain accurate time.
ꢂꢃ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Equipment connection and network setting
2.5 Configuring and controlling the projector via a web browser (Continued)
2.5.8 Security Settings
Displays and configures passwords and other security settings.
Item
Description
Administrator authority Configures the Administrator ID and Password.
Configures the Administrator ID.
The length of the text can be up to 32 alphanumeric
Administrator ID
characters.
Configures the Administrator Password.
The length of the text can be up to 255 alphanumeric
characters.
Administrator
Password
Re-enter Administrator
Password
Re-enter the above password for verification.
User authority
Configures the User ID and Password.
Configures the User ID.
The length of the text can be up to 32 alphanumeric
characters.
User ID
Configures the User Password.
The length of the text can be up to 255 alphanumeric
characters.
User Password
Re-enter User
Password
Used to re-enter the above password for verification.
ꢂꢄ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Equipment connection and network setting
2.5 Configuring and controlling the projector via a web browser (Continued)
2.5.8 Security Settings (Continued)
Item
Description
Configures the Authentication Password for the command
control.
Network Control
Configures the Authentication Password.
The length of the text can be up to 16 alphanumeric
characters.
Authentication
Password
Re-enter Authentication
Password
Used to re-enter the above password for verification.
Configures the community name if SNMP is used.
SNMP
Configures the community name.
The length of the text can be up to 64 alphanumeric
characters.
Community Name
FTP
Configures the FTP user and password.
Configures the user name. The length of the text can be up
to ꢂꢁ alphanumeric characters.
USER
Configures the password. The length of the text can be up to
ꢂꢁ alphanumeric characters.
Password
Re-enter Password
Use to re-enter the above password for verification.
Click the [Apply] button to save the settings.
NOTE • The new configuration settings are activated after restarting the
network connection. The network connection must be restarted when the
configuration settings are changed. The network connection can be restarted
using [Network Restart] on the main menu.
ꢂꢅ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Equipment connection and network setting
2.5 Configuring and controlling the projector via a web browser (Continued)
2.5.9 Projector Control
The items shown in the table below can be
performed using the [Projector Control] menu.
Select an item using the up and down arrow keys
on the PC.
Most of the items have a submenu.
Refer to the table below for details.
Controls the projector.
Item
Description
Main
Power
Turns the power On/Off.
Selects the input source.
Input Source
Picture Mode
Blank On/Off
Mute
Selects the Picture Mode setting.
Turns Blank On/Off.
Turns Mute On/Off.
Freeze
Selects the Freeze setting.
Controls the Magnify setting.
Magnify
Picture
Brightness
Contrast
Adjusts the Brightness setting.
Adjusts the Contrast setting.
Selects the Gamma setting.
Selects the Color Temp setting.
Adjusts the Color setting.
Gamma
Color Temp
Color
Tint
Adjusts the Tint setting.
Sharpness
Active Iris
MyMemory Recall
MyMemory Save
Adjusts the Sharpness setting.
Selects the Active Iris setting.
Recalls the MyMemory data.
Saves the MyMemory data.
38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Equipment connection and network setting
2.5 Configuring and controlling the projector via a web browser (Continued)
2.5.9 Projector Control (Continued)
Item
Description
Image
Aspect
Selects the Aspect setting.
Over Scan
V Position
H Position
H Phase
Selects the Over Scan setting.
Adjusts the V Position.
Adjusts the H Position.
Adjusts the H Phase.
H Size
Adjusts the H Size.
Auto Adjust
Performs Auto Adjustment.
Input
Progressive
Video NR
Selects the progressive setting.
Selects the Video NR setting.
Selects the 3D-YCS setting.
3D-YCS
Color Space
Component
C-Video Format
S-Video Format
M1-D
Selects the Color Space.
Selects the Component terminal setting.
Selects the Video Format setting.
Selects the S-Video Format setting.
Selects the M1-D setting.
Frame Lock
RGB in-1
Enables/Disables Frame Lock.
Selects the RGB1 input signal type.
Selects the RGB2 input signal type.
RGB in-2
Setup
Auto Keystone Execute Performs the Automatic keystone distortion correction.
Keystone V
Keystone H
Whisper
Adjusts the Vertical Keystone setting.
Adjusts the Horizontal Keystone setting.
Selects the Fan speed. (Normal or Whisper)
Selects the Mirror status.
Mirror
ꢂꢆ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Equipment connection and network setting
2.5 Configuring and controlling the projector via a web browser (Continued)
2.5.9 Projector Control (Continued)
Item
Description
Audio
Volume
Adjusts the Volume setting.
Treble
Adjust the Treble setting.
Bass
Adjusts the Bass setting.
SRS WOW
Speaker
Selects the SRS WOW setting.
Turns Speaker On/Off.
Audio-RGB1
Audio-RGB2
Audio-M1-D
Audio-Video
Audio-S-Video
Audio-Component
Audio-MIU
Assigns the Audio-RGB1 input terminal.
Assigns the Audio-RGB2 input terminal.
Assigns the Audio-M1-D input terminal.
Assigns the Audio-Video input terminal.
Assigns the Audio-S-Video input terminal.
Assigns the Audio-Component input terminal.
Assigns the Audio-MIU input terminal.
Screen
Language
Selects the Language for the OSD.
Adjusts the vertical Menu Position.
Adjusts the horizontal Menu Position.
Selects the Blank mode.
Menu Position V
Menu Position H
Blank
Startup
Selects the Startup screen mode.
Turns MyScreen Lock On/Off.
MyScreen Lock
Message
Turns the Message function On/Off.
Option
Auto Search
Auto Keystone
Auto on
Turns the Automatic signal search function On/Off.
Turns the Automatic keystone distortion correction function On/Off.
Turns the Auto on function On/Off.
Configures the timer to shut off the projector when no signal
is detected.
Auto off
Assigns the functions for the MY BUTTON1 buttons on the
included remote control.
My Button-1
Assigns the functions for the MY BUTTON2 buttons on the
included remote control.
My Button-2
Auto Adjust
Enables/Disables Auto Adjustment.
Remote Receiv. Front Enable/Disable Remote Receiv. Front.
Remote Receiv. Rear Enable/Disable Remote Receiv. Rear.
Remote Receiv. Top
Remote Freq. Normal Enable/Disable
Remote Freq. High Enable/Disable
Enable/Disable Remote Receiv. Top.
40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Equipment connection and network setting
2.5 Configuring and controlling the projector via a web browser (Continued)
2.5.10 Projector Status
Displays and configures the current projector status.
Item
Error Status
Description
Displays the current error status
Lamp Time
Filter Time
Power Status
Input Status
Blank On/Off
Mute
Displays the usage time for the current lamp.
Displays the usage time for the current filter.
Displays the current power status.
Displays the current input signal source.
Displays the current Blank On/Off status.
Displays the current Mute On/Off status.
Displays the current Freeze On/Off status.
Freeze
2.5.11 Network Restart
Restarts the projector’s network connection.
Item
Description
Restarts the projector’s network connection in order to
activate new configuration settings.
Restart
NOTE • Restarting requires you to re-log on in order to further control or
configure the projector via a web browser.
2.5.12 Logoff
When logoff is clicked, the logon screen is displayed ( 21 : Fig. 2.5.a).
41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Equipment connection and network setting
2.6 Utilize Web Remote Control
You can use your Web browser to remote control the projector once the projector
is properly configured and connected to your PC via the wireless LAN card or via
wired LAN.
NOTE • Do not attempt to control the projector with the projector's remote
control and via your Web browser at the same time. Attempt to do so may
causes a projector operational error.
Open browser when it is possible to communicate with projector. Corresponding
browser is Internet Explorer 5.5 or later.
Specify http://(projector IP address)/ to start.
For example, http://192.168.1.10/
(Input this URL when IP address is not changed.)
After start up, enter your ID and password, and click [Logon]. Following window
appears as shown in fig. 2.6.a.
Fig. 2.6.a Utility selection window for Web Remote Control
42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Equipment connection and network setting
2.6 Utilize Web Remote Control (Continued)
Click “Remote Control” in this window to display Web Remote Control as shown in
fig.2.6.b.
The same operation as the
bundled remote control will done.
UP/LEFT/RIGHT/DOWN
corresponds to ▲/◄/►/▼
respectively.
Each mode will be activated by
clicking these buttons.
• LIVE MODE
• THUMBNAIL
• SLIDE SHOW
• DIRECTORY
Fig. 2.6.b Web Remote Control
NOTE • Web Remote Control does not support repeat function when it is kept
clicking.
• Since automatic repeat function is not available, click the button necessary
times to reach your demand.
• If you click the button continuously, some command will not be transferred.
Wait for a while, and Click again.
•
When the power button is pushed, a message comes up to confirm the operation.
If you wish to turn it off, push OK, otherwise push CANCEL.
PAGE DOWN and PAGE UP buttons on web remote control can not be used as
mouse emulation function of the projector.
•
43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. How to use Projector software – Basics -
3. How to use Projector software – Basics -
3.1 How to use “MIU Live Viewer”
This section explains how to use the “MIU Live Viewer”.
3.1.1. Install “MIU Live Viewer”
In order to use the projector with a PC for Live Mode, you will first need to install
the accompanying software on all the PCs you will be using.
Minimum PC Hardware and Software Requirements
• OS:
Windows 2000 Professional Service Pack4,
Windows XP Home Edition/Professional
• Graphic Interface: DirectX 6.1a or higher; Video RAM 4MB or higher
(8MB recommended)
• CPU:
• Display:
Pentium III (600MHz or higher recommended)
VGA 640x480 or higher (XGA 1024x768 recommended) 65,536
simultaneous colors or higher
NOTE • Set your PC’s resolution to XGA or less.
• In some cases, Screen will not be displayed correctly like no displays larger
than XGA portion.
• Images might not been transmitted, caused by OS version or the driver
software for Network Adaptor.
It is highly recommended that OS and the driver should be updated to the latest.
• Memory:
64MB or higher (128MB or higher if using Windows XP)
•
Available Hard Disk Space: 10MB or higher
• Web browser:
• CD-ROM drive
Internet Explorer® (5.5 or higher)
• PC with PC card slot (PCMCIA Type-II) interface and IEEE802.11g wireless
LAN PC card or PC with USB Interface and IEEE802.11g wireless LAN USB
adaptor.
NOTE • Not required for PCs with built-in 802.11g wireless LAN.
• Depending on the type of wireless LAN card and PC you are using, the
projector may not be able to communicate properly with your PC, even if the
PC you are using is equipped with built-in wireless LAN functionality.
Should communication problems occur, please procure a Wi-Fi certified
wireless LAN card.
44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. How to use Projector software – Basics -
3.1 How to use “MIU Live Viewer” (Continued)
3.1.2. Software Installation Procedure
1) Turn on the PC.
2) Shut down all applications.
3) Insert the accompanying CD-ROM into the
PC's CD-ROM drive.
4) After a moment, the Welcome to MIU Utilities
Setup dialog will appear as shown on the right.
Press Next.
NOTE If the Welcome to MIU Utilities Setup dialog doesn't appear, proceed as
follows:
(1) Click on the Start button on the toolbar and select Run.
(2) Enter E:\software\setup.exe and then press OK.
If your CD-ROM drive is not drive E on your PC, you will need to
replace E with the correct drive letter assigned to your CD-ROM
drive.
If software has been already installed, Uninstallation will be done. Click the cancel
button, then uninstallation will be canceled. If you uninstalled the software by mis-
operation, please re-install the software from first procedure.
5) The License Agreement dialog appears. If you
accept it, press the “Yes”.
6) The Choose Destination Location dialog
appears. Press Next.
NOTE • The C:\Program Files\MIU_Utility folder will be created and the
program will be installed into that folder.
•
If you wish to install to a different folder, click Browse and select another folder.
7) Confirm the program folder name.
If MIU_Utility is okay, press Next to continue.
If not, enter the desired folder name and then
press Next.
45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. How to use Projector software – Basics -
3.1 How to use “MIU Live Viewer” (Continued)
8) The Hardware Installation dialog appears.
Press Continue Anyway.
9) After a moment, installation will complete and
the Setup Complete dialog will appear as
shown on the right. Click Finish.
This completes the software installation. Then
your PC automatically restarts.
(1) To confirm that the software as been
properly installed, press the Start button on
the toolbar, select All Programs and then
select the MIU Utility folder.
(2) MIU Live Viewer will appear in that folder if
the installation was successful.
3.1.3 Explanation of “MIU Live Viewer”
Double click “LiveViewer.exe” to start up. Fig. 3.1.3.a appears on your screen.
t
r
q
e
w
y
u
s
i
a
o
Fig. 3.1.3.a “MIU Live Viewer” Window
46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. How to use Projector software – Basics -
3.1 How to use “MIU MIU Live Viewer” (Continued)
[“MIU Live Viewer” window: Fig. 3.1.3.a]
1) “File” button
Display file menu.
2) “Help” button
Display “MIU Live Viewer” information.
3) Stop button
Disconnect projector connection.
4) Capture start button
Start real time display.
NOTE • Pictures are not displayed correctly when the start/stop buttons are
clicked repeatedly.
5) Minimize button
Close “MIU Live Viewer” window and display “MIU Live Viewer” as icon on the
task tray.
6) “Option” button
Display Option window.
7) “Refresh” button
Refresh the current PC network setting.
8) “Exit” button
Terminate “MIU Live Viewer”.
9) “Find” button
Search connectable projectors.
10) “One-Click” button
Connect projector and PC without network setting of the PC.
11) “Enable Device”
Display network-connectable projector list.
NOTE • When Multi PC mode is not selected, if there is no other PC
connected, the last image will be held on screen until getting out of Live Mode
or turning the projector off.
Thanks to the feature, the PC can be used to prepare the next presentation file
or others without showing it on screen if the communication to the projector is
turned off.
47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. How to use Projector software – Basics -
3.1 How to use “MIU Live Viewer” (Continued)
[“Options” window]
[“General” tab, Fig. 3.1.3.b]
Fig.3.1.3.b “Options”, “General” tab
1) CPU Share
Set up any capturing performance on the PC screen by using control bar
Low (At the far left): Set this position when many CPU resources are required
by applications other than “MIU Live Viewer”. This setting is not
good for displaying frequently changed patterns due to decrease in
screen refresh rate by “MIU Live Viewer” performance degrading.
High (At the far right): Set this position when “MIU Live Viewer” requires many
CPU resources. Screen refresh rate increases when “MIU Live
Viewer” is used, but decreases the speed of other application
speed.
2) MultiPC Mode
Select connected PC quantity from 1PC to 4PCs.
3) Cursor Emulation
Enabling this function “ON”, display cursor (pointer) prepared by this projector
when cursor is not displayed on output screen. Take out check mark to make it
“OFF” when PC and projector both cursors are displayed.
48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. How to use Projector software – Basics -
3.1 How to use “MIU Live Viewer” (Continued)
[JPEG tab]
Fig. 3.1.3.c “Options”, “JPEG” tab
1) JPEG Quality
When “MIU Live Viewer” is used, it captures PC screen image. Then that is
compressed as JPEG and sent to projector. By control bar in this tab, you can
set compression rate.
Low (At the far left, Low picture quality): Make JEPG compression rate high.
Screen refresh interval becomes shorter due to low volume
transferred data, but picture quality decreases.
High (At the far right, High picture quality): Make JEPG compression rate
low. Screen refresh interval becomes longer due to high volume
transferred data, but picture quality increases.
[Icon in task tray]
To display “MIU Live Viewer” icon in task tray, click “Minimize” button in “MIU Live
Viewer” window. The icon with yellow thunder mark shows that communication is
connected, and it with red cross mark shows that it is disconnected. (Fig. 3.1.3.d
shows while communication is disconnected.)
Fig. 3.1.3.d Icon in task tray
Double click “MIU Live Viewer” icon in task tray to display “MIU Live Viewer”
window.
49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. How to use Projector software – Basics -
3.1.4 Utilize “MIU Live Viewer” – Basic -
This section explains basic of how to use “MIU Live Viewer” functions.
• Before start up the MIU Live Viewer, you have to set the projector into LIVE
MODE by either of following way.
1) from Web Remote Control
(1) Select LIVE MODE
2) from OSD Menu
(1) Set the port into MIU menu by remote control or Keypad.
(2) Open the OSD Menu by pressing ▲/◄/►/▼ Keypad button on the projector
or Menu button on remote control.
(3) Select the LIVE MODE in MIU Menu, and press the ► button on Keypad on
the projector or Enter button on remote control.
ꢀ/'07ꢀ=4)$ꢁ?
ꢀꢀꢀꢂ5'.'%6
ꢀ2+%674'
ꢀ+/#)'
ꢀ+0276
.+8'ꢀ/1&'
2%ꢃ.'55ꢀ24'5'06#6+10
5'672
Gꢃ5*16
ꢀ5'672
+0(14/#6+10
5'48+%'
ꢀ5%4''0
ꢀ126+10
ꢀ/+7
ꢀ'#5;ꢀ/'07
• After setting to the projector into LIVE MODE.
1) Start “MIU Live Viewer”. If “MIU Live Viewer” installation is not completed,
install it referring to 3.1.1 Install “MIU Live Viewer”.
Fig. 3.1.4.a Screen after “MIU Live Viewer” starting up
50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. How to use Projector software – Basics -
3.1 How to use “MIU Live Viewer” (Continued)
2) Start Web Remote Control (refer to 2.6 Utilize Web Remote Control), and click
“LIVE MODE” button on Web Remote Control to change projector mode to
“MIU Live Viewer”. After changing, screen of the output monitor connected with
projector turn all blue.
3) Perform following operations on “MIU Live Viewer”
(1) Click “Find” button to search communication available projector. If any
projector is not found at “Enable Device” tab, try search again after referring
section ꢁ.ꢁ.
Display communication possible
projector like this if available as a
result of search.
Fig. 3.1.4.b. Projector research result display (1)
(2) When communication available projector is found at 1), click the found
projector to select
Click the projector line to connect.
IP address appears in the upper
column.
Fig. 3.1.4.c Projector research result display (2)
ꢃꢀ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. How to use Projector software – Basics -
3.1 How to use “MIU Live Viewer” (Continued)
(3) Click Capture start button.
Fig. 3.1.4.d Start capturing
Based on the above operation, if captured picture of PC screen is displayed real
time on monitor connected with projector, it is succeeded. Much easier to connect
if you utilize “One-Click-Communication” function. (Refer to section 2.2.)
This is basic usage. Refer to section 4.1 for further explanation of advanced MIU
Live Viewer usage.
3.2 Utilize “PC-LESS Presentation” – Basic -
Explain basics of how to utilize “PC-LESS Presentation”.
1) Save JPEG picture files into root directory in SD card or USB Memory. Insert
SD card into SD slot on projector or insert USB memory into AUX I/O slot on
projector (Inserting an SD card and USB memory of the User's Manual - Operating
Guide).
2) Connecting as network refer to section 3 and start the Web Remote Control.
3) Click “THUMBNAIL” button on the Web Remote Control to change projector
mode to “PC-LESS Presentation”. Then thumbnail appears.
To remove the SD card or USB memory,
4) Be sure to perform the REMOVE procedure using the SERVICE item in the
MIU menu (MIU Menu of the User's Manual - Operating Guide). When an error
dialog appears in the procedure, please re-perform the procedure after waiting
for a while.
5) When you remove the SD wireless network card, be sure to turn the projector off.
6) Remove the SD card or USB Memory. For removing the SD card, remove the
SD card slot cover before, and put the cover back after.
ꢃꢁ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. How to use Projector software – Basics -
3.2 Utilize “PC-LESS Presentation” –Basic - (Continued)
If thumbnail appears by above operation, it is succeeded. (Fig.3.2.a) This is basic
usage. There are varieties of usage for “PC-LESS Presentation”. Refer to section
4.2 for further detailed explanation.
ꢀ6*7/$0#+.ꢀ=ꢀ5&ꢀ?
ꢀ2%ꢁ.'55
ꢀ24'5'06#6+10
ꢀ/'07
㪈
㪋
㪉
㪌
㪊
㪍
+OCIGꢁꢂ
+OCIGꢁꢈ
+OCIGꢁꢉ
+OCIGꢁꢂꢅ
+OCIGꢁꢌ
+OCIGꢁꢊ
+OCIGꢁꢋ
+OCIGꢁꢂꢂ
+OCIGꢁꢎ
+OCIGꢁꢍ
+OCIGꢁꢇ
+OCIGꢁꢂꢌ
ꢀ5.+&'ꢀ5*19
ꢀ56#46ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢆꢀꢂ
ꢀ5612ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢆꢀꢇꢇꢇ
ꢀ+06'48#.ꢀꢀꢂꢅ5
㪎
㪏
㪐
ꢀ/1&'
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ10'ꢀ6+/'
㪈㪇
㪈㪈
㪈㪉
ꢀ2.#;
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢃꢀꢀꢄ;'5
'06'4
Fig. 3.2.a Thumbnail display
You can also activate “PC-LESS Presentation” from the OSD Menu.
1) Open the OSD Menu from the Menu button on the remote control or ▲/◄/►/▼
button on Keypad.
2) Select “PC-LESS Presentation” on the MIU Menu. And press the Enter button
on the remote control or ► button on Keypad. Then PC-LESS PRESENTATION
Menu appears.
ꢀ/'07ꢀ=4)$ꢁ?
ꢀꢀꢂ5'.'%6
2%ꢀ.'55ꢁ24'5'06#6+10
ꢁ6*7/$0#+.
ꢁ5.+&'ꢁ5*19
ꢀ2+%674'
ꢀ+/#)'
ꢀ+0276
.+8'ꢀ/1&'
2%ꢃ.'55ꢀ24'5'06#6+10
5'672
Gꢃ5*16
ꢁ&+4'%64;
ꢁꢁ
ꢁ&+52.#;ꢁ5+<'
ꢁ-';ꢁ%10(+)ꢂ
ꢀ5'672
+0(14/#6+10
5'48+%'
ꢀ5%4''0
ꢀ126+10
ꢀ/+7
ꢀ'#5;ꢀ/'07
3) Select THUMBNAIL on PC-LESS PRESENTATION Menu. And press the Enter
button on remote control or ► button on Keypad. Then thumbnail appears.
Caution • Do not pull out memory card while file is accessed.
• SDHC(4GB etc) SD memory is not supported. UP to 2GB.
• Some SD memories and/or USB memories will not work correctly.
• Security USB memory is not supported.
ꢃꢂ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Utilize projector – Advanced -
4. Utilize projector – Advanced -
4.1. Utilize “MIU Live Viewer” – Advanced -
This section explains how to connect multiple PCs.
4.1.1. Connect multiple PCs with one projector (Multiple PCs
connection)
A projector can be connected with up to 4 PCs to display multiple windows.
1
2
3
4
1
3
2
4
C
C
/
B P
S
B
D
B
C
A
R
D
/
R P
R
G
A
IO
U
IN
1
A
UX
VI
D
A
DI
1
D
I/O
5
EO
U
O
C
D
I
N
V
IN
0.5A
S-
2
VI
D
R
G
EO
B
L
A
IN
N
2
R
IN
G
B
C
A
O
C
UT
O
N
TR
O
A
U
D
L
IO
O
U
T
U
SB
Fig. 4.1.1.a Multiple PCs connection outline
Followings are required for multiple PCs connection.
- From 2 to 4 PCs (“MIU Live Viewer” installation is required to all
PCs to connect.)
- Projector: 1 unit
- Straight LAN cable: Required qty*
- Ethernet hub
* It is required to make all wireless PCs enabling wireless communication when
doing multiple PCs connection as wireless LAN connection. SD-Link11g card for
projector is required. If it is communicated by Infrastructure mode, access point
is necessary. (16)
54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Utilize projector – Advanced -
4.1. Utilize “MIU Live Viewer” – Advanced - (Continued)
[Connection]
1) Connect all PCs and projector using LAN cables and hub as shown in fig.
4.1.1.a. Connect projector and output monitor with RGB cable.
2) Start up “MIU Live Viewer” in each PC. Check the IP address in PCs and
confirm xxx of [192.168.1.xxx] in IP address is set different value in each PC.
3) Click “Find” button in “MIU Live Viewer” and search projector.
4) When projector is found, click “Option” button in “MIU Live Viewer”. Then open
“General” tub and select the number of PCs to connect as MultiPC Mode. After
selecting, click “Close” button.
5) Click Capturing Start button.
6) Repeat from 3) to 5) to all PCs.
* Display screen priority
In case of multiple PCs connection, priority is decided automatically comparing
when each PC is connected. In each mode, priority is as shown in fig. 4.1.1.b.
(Smaller number is prioritized.)
ꢂ
ꢀ
ꢁ
ꢃ
ꢁ
ꢂ
ꢀ
ꢁ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ2%
ꢁ2%U
ꢂ2%U
ꢃ2%U
Fig. 4.1.1.b Priority in each mode
Detailed conditions and specifications for priority are as follows.
a) The priority is high the PC that connects later.
b) When Multi PC Mode (2 to 4 PCs) is changed to 1 PC, changed 1 PC has
highest priority.
c) Multi PC Mode can be changed settings freely even the PC is communicating.
d) When the lower number than connected PCs is selected, lower priority PC
screens are not displayed, but connections with projector are kept.
When more than 5 PCs are connected with projector, lower priority PC connection
is disconnected.
NOTE • When Multi PC is selected, if the screen resolution on one of PCs is
changed, the PC will be given the top priority, so the mode (1 to 4PCs) set on
the PC will be effective on the projector.
• On Multi PC Mode, actual image resolution of each screen is 1/4 of the
original, then small letters or lines might be hard to be illegible.
It is recommended to use letters as large as possible. Or try manual H.Phase
adjustment which might improve image quality.
ꢃꢃ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Utilize projector – Advanced -
4.2 Utilize “PC-LESS Presentation” – Advanced -
“PC-LESS Presentation” reads image data from memory cards inserted into SD or
USB slot and perform followings.
SD Memory and SD Wireless card can not be inserted at the same time.
- Thumbnail display (Section 4.2.1)
- Display in full screen (Section 4.2.2)
- Slide show (Section 4.2.3)
- Directory display (Section 4.2.4)
ꢀ6*7/$0#+.ꢀ=ꢀ5&ꢀ?
ꢀ2%ꢁ.'55
ꢀ24'5'06#6+10
ꢀ/'07
㪈
㪋
㪉
㪌
㪊
㪍
+OCIGꢁꢂ
+OCIGꢁꢈ
+OCIGꢁꢉ
+OCIGꢁꢂꢅ
+OCIGꢁꢌ
+OCIGꢁꢊ
+OCIGꢁꢋ
+OCIGꢁꢂꢂ
+OCIGꢁꢎ
+OCIGꢁꢍ
+OCIGꢁꢇ
+OCIGꢁꢂꢌ
ꢀ5.+&'ꢀ5*19
ꢀ56#46ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢆꢀꢂ
ꢀ5612ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢆꢀꢇꢇꢇ
ꢀ+06'48#.ꢀꢀꢂꢅ5
㪎
㪏
㪐
ꢀ/1&'
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ10'ꢀ6+/'
㪈㪇
㪈㪈
㪈㪉
ꢀ2.#;
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢃꢀꢄ;'5
'06'4
Fig. 4.2.a Thumbnail display
Fig. 4.2.b Display in full screen
Fig. 4.2.c Slide show
Fig. 4.2.d Directory display
ꢃꢄ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Utilize projector – Advanced -
4.2 Utilize “PC-LESS Presentation” – Advanced - (Continued)
Following picture and movie files can be displayed.
• JPEG (.jpeg, .jpg) * Progressive is not corresponded.
• BMP (.bmp)
• PNG (.png)
• MPEG4 (.mp4) * Supported bit resolution rate is less than 1Mbps in Simple
Profile.
Supported resolution is less than VGA.
Supported Audio format is only AAC.
4.2.1 Thumbnail display
Fig.4.2.1 shows thumbnail display. Click [THUMBNAIL] button in the Web Remote
Control to display menu on the screen in order to make thumbnail display.
You can also display thumbnail by remote control or keypad (53).
Thumbnail Images
ꢀ6*7/$0#+.ꢀ=ꢀ5&ꢀ?
ꢀ2%ꢁ.'55
ꢀ24'5'06#6+10
ꢀ/'07
㪈
㪋
㪉
㪌
㪊
㪍
Focused image
+OCIGꢁꢂ
+OCIGꢁꢈ
+OCIGꢁꢉ
+OCIGꢁꢂꢅ
+OCIGꢁꢌ
+OCIGꢁꢊ
+OCIGꢁꢋ
+OCIGꢁꢂꢂ
+OCIGꢁꢎ
+OCIGꢁꢍ
+OCIGꢁꢇ
+OCIGꢁꢂꢌ
ꢀ5.+&'ꢀ5*19
ꢀ56#46ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢆꢀꢂ
ꢀ5612ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢆꢀꢇꢇꢇ
ꢀ+06'48#.ꢀꢀꢂꢅ5
Thumbnail Menu
㪎
㪏
㪐
ꢀ/1&'
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ10'ꢀ6+/'
㪈㪇
㪈㪈
㪈㪉
ꢀ2.#;
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢃꢀꢄ;'5
'06'4
Fig. 4.2.1. Thumbnail display
ꢃꢅ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Utilize projector – Advanced -
4.2 Utilize “PC-LESS Presentation” – Advanced - (Continued)
Following operations can be accessible while thumbnail is displayed.
▲/◄/►/▼
Move cursor.
Remote control/Keypad
PAGE UP PAGE DOWN
Switch pages.
Remote control
ENTER Remote control
Display selected image in full screen.
INPUT Keypad
MENU Remote control Displays PC-LESS PRESENTATION Menu.
* These operations are not accessible while projector OSD menu is displayed.
NOTE • Thumbnail display shows 12 pictures in 1 page as maximum.
• It is not possible to change the input port by INPUT button when THUMBNAIL,
SLIDE SHOW, or DIRECTORY is displayed.
• Displays the projector Menu before changing the input port .
• Select the right edge images and press the ► button, then thumbnail menu
will be selected.
• Some error Icons will be displayed in thumbnail.
This file seems to be broken or not supported format.
This file exists only in Playlist (67), but does not exist anywhere.
58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Utilize projector – Advanced -
4.2 Utilize “PC-LESS Presentation” – Advanced - (Continued)
4.2.2 Display in full screen
Full screen display (fig.4.2.2) shows a full display image on the PC. To make Full-
screen display, click [MENU] button in the Web Remote Control menu on the
screen. When select [PC-LESS Presentation], then [Thumbnail] from the menu,
click [ENTER] so that moves to be full-screen display.
Full-screen Display
Fig.4.2.2 Full-screen Display
While displaying in full screen, following operation can be accessible from the
Web Remote Control.
• Rotate image 90 degrees clockwise or otherwise. Once image
is rotated, it keeps the display image even though it is switched.
(Thumbnail or slide show display) To return the original, rotating
the image 360 degrees or erase play list in memory card. (Refer
to section 4.3)
• Moving the slide forward or backward.
◄/►
or
▲/▼
(Selected on KEY
CONFIG. MENU 60)
ENTER Remote control
Displaying thumbnail.
INPUT Keypad
MENU Remote control Displays PC-LESS PRESENTATION Menu.
* These operations are not accessible while projector OSD menu is displayed.
NOTE • It is not possible to change the input port by INPUT button of keypad
when displaying the THUMBNAIL, SLIDE SHOW, or DIRECTORY.
• Displays the projector Menu before changing the input port.
• Image might not be displayed properly at the beginning or end of MP4 file
playback.
ꢃꢆ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Utilize projector – Advanced -
4.2 Utilize “PC-LESS Presentation” – Advanced - (Continued)
You can display the image file with your desired size.
1) Select the DISPLAY SIZE in PC-LESS PRESENTATION Menu.
2) Press the Enter button on the remote
2%ꢀ.'55ꢁ24'5'06#6+10
control or ► button on the Keypad.
ꢁ6*7/$0#+.
ꢁ5.+&'ꢁ5*19
ꢁ&+4'%64;
ꢁꢁ
ꢁ&+52.#;ꢁ5+<'
ꢁ-';ꢁ%10(+)ꢂ
3) Then DISPLAY SIZE menu appears.
&+52.#;ꢀ5+<'
4'#.
014/#.
(7..
4) Select your desired DISPLAY SIZE.
• REAL : Displays the image at original size.
Displays the image at the center of screen if original size is smaller
than the screen size.
Displays only center of the image if original size is larger than the
screen size.
• NORMAL : Displays the image for the maximum size on the screen, and
keeps original aspect.
• FULL : Displays the image at the full size screen.
Original aspect will be changed to full size display.
The animation file is always played at VGA mode if resolution is larger than VGA.
The animation file is always played at the center of screen if resolution is smaller
than VGA.
You can select the KEY configuration from 2 preset pattern assigned to ▲/▼/◄/►
keys on Tumbnail or Directory mode.
1) Select the KEY CONFIG. in PC-LESS PRESENTATION Menu.
2) Press ► button.
-';ꢀ%10(+)ꢁ
3) The KEY CONFIG. menu appears.
Pattern A
$#%-
0':6
$#%-
0':6
Pattern B
4) Select the KEY CONFIG. pattern.
• pattern A : ◄ : rotation to left
► : rotation to right
▲ : previous image ▼ : next image
• pattern B : ◄ : previous image ► : next image
▲ : rotation to right ▼ : rotation to left
60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Utilize projector – Advanced -
4.2 Utilize “PC-LESS Presentation” – Advanced - (Continued)
4.2.3. Slide show
Slide show (fig.4.2.3) displays a full screen image and move to the next interval.
Click the “SLIDE SHOW” button in Web Remote Control, then Slide show will be
played. Display time can be set by the Playlist (refer to section 4.3) and menu.
Full-screen Display
Fig. 4.2.3 Slide show
Following operations are accessible while slide show is displayed.
ENTER Remote control
Display thumbnails.
INPUT Keypad
MENU Remote control Displays PC-LESS PRESENTATION Menu.
* These operations are not accessible while projector OSD menu is displayed.
NOTE • It is impossible to change the input port by INPUT button if
THUMBNAIL, SLIDE SHOW, or DIRECTORY is displayed.
• Displays the projector Menu before changing the input port .
• Images can be displayed when it is recorded in the Playlist.
•
Image can not be displayed in the thumbnail if it is not recorded in the Playlist. (67)
• The START #, STOP #, INTERVAL, and MODE are set by thumbnail menu
once, this setting has more priority than the Playlist.
• If you would like to release the priority, delete the slidemode.txt file from
directory.
• When SLIDE SHOW mode is set to ONE TIME, the last slide of the
presentation will be held on screen till either of ENTER key the remote or
INPUT key on the projector is pushed.
ꢄꢀ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Utilize projector – Advanced -
4.2 Utilize “PC-LESS Presentation” – Advanced - (Continued)
You can also play the Slide show with the projector Menu.
Select “SLIDE SHOW” on PC-LESS PRESENTATION Menu. And press the Enter
button on the remote control or ► button on Keypad. Then Slide show will start.
2%ꢀ.'55ꢁ24'5'06#6+10
ꢁ6*7/$0#+.
ꢁ5.+&'ꢁ5*19
ꢁ&+4'%64;
ꢁꢁ
ꢁ&+52.#;ꢁ5+<'
ꢁ-';ꢁ%10(+)ꢂ
You can play the Slide show at your desired configuration.
Configure the Slide Show items in THUMBNAIL.
ꢀ2%ꢁ.'55
ꢀ24'5'06#6+10
ꢀ/'07
1) START #
2) STOP #
3) INTERVAL : Set the interval Slide show.
: Set the beginning number of Slide show.
: Set the end number of Slide show.
ꢀ5.+&'ꢀ5*19
ꢀ56#46ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢄꢀꢂ
ꢀ5612ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢄꢀꢅꢅꢅ
ꢀ+06'48#.ꢀꢀꢂꢃ5
4) MODE
: Select the Slide show mode.
ONE TIME : Play the Slide show one time.
ENDLESS : Play the Slide show endless.
: Play the Slide show.
ꢀ/1&'
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ10'ꢀ6+/'
5) PLAY
ꢀ2.#;
ꢄꢁ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Utilize projector – Advanced -
4.2 Utilize “PC-LESS Presentation” – Advanced - (Continued)
4.2.4 Directory display
Directory display (Fig.4.2.4) shows saved directories and files including
undisplayable files in the memory card on the tree structure. Click the
“DIRECTORY” button in the Web Remote Control, then the directory tree will be
displayed. While displaying directory, preview picture of selected file is shown on
the top left. In case of moving picture, initial flame is displayed as preview. Nothing
is displayed in case of directories or undisplayable files. Displayable file can be
played if “ENTER” is clicked when its file is selected.
Select the directory and press the Enter button, then the files in the directory will
be displayed in the thumbnail.
Image display preview
File information
Tree structure
directory
Fig. 4.2.4 Directory display screen
ꢄꢂ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Utilize projector – Advanced -
4.2 Utilize “PC-LESS Presentation” – Advanced - (Continued)
Following operations can be accessible while directory is displayed.
▲/▼
►
Moving selected item upward or downward.
Open the closed folder.
◄
Close the folder.
PAGE UP PAGE DOWN
Show undisplayed portion if the tree display is not fit inside the
screen.
Remote control
Play displayable file. While directory is selected, thumbnail is
displayed. It is not possible to play undisplayable file. Click
“ENTER” while playing, so it returns to the directory display.
ENTER Remote control
INPUT Keypad
MENU Remote control Displays the menu.
* These operations are not accessible while projector OSD menu is displayed.
NOTE • It is not possible to change the input port by INPUT button when
THUMBNAIL, SLIDE SHOW, or DIRECTORY is displayed.
• Displays the projector Menu before changing the input port .
• Only alphanumeric characters can be used for directory name and file name.
• This directory display is able to show up to 10 layers. Over 10 layers of files
and folders can not be shown. Some files and directories are not displayed
if there are too many. In this case, delete some files in the directory or some
directories in the memory card.
64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Utilize projector – Advanced -
4.2 Utilize “PC-LESS Presentation” – Advanced - (Continued)
You can also display the directory with the projector Menu.
Select “DIRECTORY” in PC-LESS PRESENTATION Menu. And press the Enter
button on remote control or ► button on Keypad. Then directory will be displayed.
2%ꢀ.'55ꢁ24'5'06#6+10
ꢁ6*7/$0#+.
ꢁ5.+&'ꢁ5*19
ꢁ&+4'%64;
ꢁꢁ
ꢁ&+52.#;ꢁ5+<'
ꢁ-';ꢁ%10(+)ꢂ
[File information display]
File information display shows following information.
Displayable still image file
- File format (JPEG, PNG and BMP)
- Time stamp (When file is created)
- File size (Size of File)
- Image size (File resolution)
Displayable moving image file
- File format (MP4)
- Time stamp (When the file is created)
- File size (Size of File)
- Movie size (File resolution)
- Movie time (Play time)
Undisplayable file
- File format (Directory: Directory, Undisplayable file: File)
- Time stamp (When file is created)
- File size (Size of File)
ꢄꢃ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Utilize projector – Advanced -
4.2 Utilize “PC-LESS Presentation” – Advanced - (Continued)
4.2.5 “PC-LESS Presentation” error message
Error message is displayed at a specific condition while “PC-LESS Presentation”
mode. It appears at the bottom and the gray area of screen.
Fig. 4.2.5 “PC-LESS Presentation” error message
“PC-LESS Presentation” error message list
Error message
Error content
Display mode
Display in full screen and slide
show
File not found
Displayable file does not exist.
Play list file has malfunction. (Over
64kB file, over 1022 characters
per line in file or linefeed code
malfunction)
Display in full screen and slide
show
Illegal Playlist file
ꢄꢄ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Utilize projector – Advanced -
4.3 Playlist
Playlist is a DOS format text file, which decides the order of displayed still image
files or moving image files in the thumbnail or the slide show.
Playlist file name is [imagelistdir.txt]. It is created in each folder when “PC-LESS
Presentation” is displayed. The timing of playlist creation is when “PC-LESS
Presentation” is displayed in the directory, which any playlist file does not exist.
The playlist is created in the displayed directory.
NOTE • Playlist can not be overwritten. Once it is created, data remains.
Therefore, the image can not displayed if it is additionally saved to the memory
card that is on the playlist. In order to see added picture file, delete playlist.
Playlist is editable on the PC. Display time and rotation information at the slide
show can be set based on specifying settings. Of course it is possible to make
certain file image undisplayable in a playlist deleting 1 line relating to the file from
playlist. Also, it is possible to see added picture image based on adding picture
image file name and pass name of destination to save in playlist.
[Example of adding image file] (Pass name/pass name/…/file name, display
time, rotation information)
images/photo1/img001.jpg
images/photo1/img002.jpg, 2000
images/photo1/img003.jpg, 500, rot1
images/photo1/img004.jpg
images/photo1/img005.jpg, 500, rot2
The number after the extension is the slide show display time. It can be set
between 0 and 999900. (ms) Least input increment is 100 ms. The end of display
time means rotation information. 90 degrees clockwise rotation becomes rot1, rot2
and rot3. (When no rotation, not specify or specify rot0.)
Display time and rotation information should be used “,” for separation.
Caution • Maximum characters for the playlist in 1 line at playlist is 1024
including linefeed. If it exceeds, playlist becomes invalid and error.
• Playlist maximum size is 64kB. If it exceeds, it becomes invalid.
• Playlist can register up to 999 image files. If it exceeds, first 999 files can be
utilized.
• When image file is added to the memory card and be able to see on the screen,
delete existing playlist in the memory card.
ꢄꢅ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Utilize projector – Advanced -
4.4 Failure & Warning Alerts via E-mail
The projector can automatically send an alert to specified e-mail addresses when
the projector requires maintenance or has encountered an error.
NOTE • Up to five e-mail addresses can be specified.
• The projector may be not able to send e-mail if the projector suddenly loses
power.
Mail Settings ( 26)
To use the projector’s e-mail function please configure the following items via a
web browser.
Example: If the IP address of the projector is set to 192.168.1.10/:
1) Enter [http://192.168.1.10] into the address bar of the web browser.
2) Enter the Administrator ID and Password and click [Logon].
3) Click [Port Settings] on the main menu.
4) Click the [Enable] check box to open the SMTP Port.
5) Click the [Apply] button to save the settings.
NOTE • A Network Restart is required after the SMTP Port configuration
settings have changed. Click [Network Restart] and configure the following
items.
6) Click [Mail Settings] and configure each item. Refer to the [Mail Settings]
item in [Configuring and Controlling the Projector via a Web Browser] for
further information.
7) Click the [Apply] button to save the settings.
NOTE • Click the [Send Test Mail] button in [Mail Settings] to confirm
that the e-mail settings are correct. The following mail will be delivered to the
specified addresses.
Subject line : Test Mail
Text : Send Test Mail
<Projector name>
Date
<Testing date>
Time
<Testing time>
IP Address
<Projector IP address>
MAC Address <Projector MAC address>
68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Utilize projector – Advanced -
Mail Settings (Continued)
8) Configure the Failure/Warning Alerts via E-mail settings. Click [Alert Settings]
on the main menu.
9) Select and configure each alert item. Refer to [Alert Settings] in [Configuring
and Controlling the Projector via a Web Browser] for further information.
10) Click the [Apply] button to save the settings.
Failure/Warning e-mails are formatted as follows:
Subject line : <Mail title>
<Projector name>
Text
: <Mail text>
Date
<Failure/Warning date>
<Failure/Warning time>
<Projector IP address>
Time
IP Address
MAC Address <Projector MAC address>
ꢄꢆ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Utilize projector – Advanced -
4.5 Projector management via SNMP
When SNMP is enabled, the projector is able to send Failure/Warning Alerts to a
specified PC.
NOTE • It is recommended that SNMP functions be carried out by a network
administrator.
• SNMP management software must be installed on the computer to monitor
the projector via SNMP.
SNMP settings ( 25)
Configure the following items via a web browser to use SNMP.
Example: If the IP address of the projector is set to 192.168.1.10/:
1) Enter [http://192.168.1.10] into the address bar of the web browser.
2) Enter the Administrator ID and Password and click [Logon].
3) Click [Port Settings] on the main menu.
4) Click the [Enable] check box to open the SNMP Port.
Set the IP address to send the SNMP Trap to when a Failure/Warning occurs.
NOTE • A Network Restart is required after the SNMP Trap configuration
settings have been changed. Click [Network Restart] and configure the
following items.
5) Click [Security Settings] on the main menu.
6) Click [SNMP] and set the Community Name on the screen that is displayed.
NOTE • A Network Restart is required after the Community Name has been
changed.
• Click [Network Restart] and configure the following items.
7) Configure the settings for Trap transmission of Failures/Warnings. Click
[Alert Settings] on the main menu and select the Failure/Warning item to be
configured.
8) Click the [Enable] check box to send out the SNMP trap for Failures/Warnings.
Clear the [Enable] check box when SNMP trap transmission is not required.
9) Click the [Apply] button to save the settings.
70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Utilize projector – Advanced -
4.6 Controlling the Projector via Scheduling
The projector can be automatically controlled via scheduling.
NOTE • You can schedule the following control events: Power ON/OFF, Input
Source and Transferred Image Display.
• There are 3 types of Scheduling, 1) daily 2) day of the week 3) specific date.
• The priority for scheduled events is as follows 1) specific date 2) day of the
week 3) daily.
• Up to five specific dates are available for scheduled events. Priority is given to
those with the lower numbers when more than one event has been scheduled
for the same date and time (e.g., ‘Specific day No. 1’ has priority over ‘Specific
day No. 2’ and so on.
• Be sure to set the date and time before enabling scheduled events.
ꢅꢀ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Utilize projector – Advanced -
Date/Time Settings ( 34)
The Date/Time setting can be adjusted via a web browser.
Example: If the IP address of the projector is set to 192.168.1.10/:
1) Enter [http://192.168.1.10] into the address bar of the web browser.
Enter the Administrator ID and Password and click [Logon].
2) Click [Date/Time Settings] on the main menu and configure each item.
Refer to the [Date/Time Settings] item in [Configuring and Controlling the
Projector via a Web Browser] for further information.
3) Click the [Apply] button to save the settings.
NOTE • A Network Restart is required after the Daylight Savings Time or
SNTP configuration settings have been changed.
• The battery for the built in clock may be dead if the clock loses time even
when the DATE and TIME have been set correctly. Replace the battery by
following the instructions on replacing the battery.
(Internal clock battery of the User's Manual - Operating Guid)
• The Internal Clock’s time may not remain accurate. Using SNTP is
recommended to maintain accurate time.
ꢅꢁ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Utilize projector – Advanced -
Schedule Settings ( 32)
Schedule settings can be configured from a web browser.
Example: If the IP address of the projector is set to 192.168.1.10:
1) Enter [http://192.168.1.10/] into the address bar of the web browser.
2) Enter the Administrator ID and Password and click [Logon].
3) Click [Schedule Settings] on the main menu and select the required schedule
item. For example, if you want to perform the command every Sunday, please
select the [Sunday].
4) Click the [Enable] check box to enable scheduling.
5) Enter the Date (Month/Day) for specific date scheduling.
6) Click [Add] and set the time, command and parameters and click [Add This
Schedule] when you want to add a command.
7) Click the [Delete] button when you want to delete a schedule.
8) Click the [Apply] button to save the settings.
There are three types of scheduling.
1) Daily: Perform the specified operation at a specified time every day.
2) Sunday ~ Saturday: Perform the specified operation at the specified time on a
specified day of the week.
3) Specific Date: Perform the specified operation on the specified date and time.
NOTE • In Standby mode the power indicator will flash green for approx. 3
seconds when at least 1 “Power ON” schedule is saved.
• When the schedule function is used, the power cord must be connected to
the projector and the outlet and the power switch must be turned on, [ | ]. The
schedule function does not work when the power switch is turned off, [¡] or
the breaker in a room is tripped. The power indicator will lights orange or green
when the projector gets is receiving the power.
ꢅꢂ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Utilize projector – Advanced -
4.7 e-SHOT (Still Image Transfer) Display
The projector can display a still image that is transferred via the network.
e-SHOT transmission requires an exclusive application for your PC. You can
download it from the Hitachi web site (http://hitachi.us/digitalmedia). Refer to the
manual for the application for instructions.
Supported file types are JPG, BMP and PNG.
74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Utilize projector – Advanced -
4.8 Command Control via the Network
You can configure and control the projector via the network using RS-232C
commands.
Communication Port
The following two ports are assigned for the command control.
TCP #23
TCP #9715
NOTE • Command control is not available via communication port (TCP
#9716) that is used for the e-Shot transmission function.
Command Control Settings ( 25)
Configure the following items from a web browser when command control is used.
Example: If the IP address of the projector is set to 192.168.1.10:
1) Enter [http://192.168.1.10/] into the address bar of the web browser.
2) Enter the Administrator ID and Password and click [Logon].
3) Click [Port settings] on the main menu.
4) Click the [Enable] check box to open [Network Control Port (Port: 23)] to use
TCP #23. Click the [Enable] check box for the [Authentication] setting when
authentication is required, otherwise clear the check box.
5) Click the [Enable] check box to open [Network Control Port (Port: 9715)] to
use TCP #9715. Click the [Enable] check box for the [Authentication] setting
when authentication is required, otherwise clear the check box.
6) Click the [Apply] button to save the settings.
ꢅꢃ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Utilize projector – Advanced -
Command Control Settings (Continued)
When the authentication setting is enabled, the following settings are required.
(36)
7) Click [Security Settings] on the main menu.
8) Click [Network Control] and enter the desired authentication password. * See
NOTE1.
9) Click the [Apply] button to save the settings. * See NOTE2.
NOTE1 • The Authentication Password will be the same for [Network Control
Port1 (Port: 23)], [Network Control Port2 (Port: 9715)], and [Image Transfer
Port (Port: 9716)].
NOTE2 • The new configuration settings are activated after restarting the
network. Restart the network when any configuration settings are changed.
The network connection can be restarted using [Network Restart] on the main
menu.
ꢅꢄ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Utilize projector – Advanced -
Command format
Command formats differ among the different communication ports.
TCP #23
You can use the RS-232C commands without any changes. The reply data format
is the same as the RS-232C commands. However, the following reply will be sent
back in the event of authentication failure when authentication is enabled.
<Reply in the event of an authentication error>
Reply
Error code
0x04 0x00
0x1F
TCP #9715
Send Data format
The following formatting is added to the header (0x02), Data length (0x0D),
Checksum (1byte) and Connection ID (1 byte) of the RS-232C commands.
Data
length
Connection
Header
RS-232Ccommand
Checksum
ID
0x02
0x0D
13 bytes
1 byte
1 byte
Header
Data length
RS-232C commands → RS-232C commands that start with 0xBE 0xEF (13 bytes)
→ 0x02, Fixed
→ RS-232C commands byte length (0x0D, Fixed)
Check Sum
→ This is the value to make zero on the addition of the lower
8 bits from the header to the checksum.
→ Random value from 0 to 255 (This value is attached to
the reply data)
Connection ID
ꢅꢅ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Utilize projector – Advanced -
Reply Data format
The connection ID (the data is same as the connection ID data on the sending
data format) is attached to the RS-232C commands reply data.
<ACK reply>
Connection
Reply
ID
0x06
1 byte
<NAK reply>
Connection
ID
Reply
0x15
1 byte
<Error reply>
Connection
ID
Reply
0x1C
Error code
2 bytes
1 byte
<Data reply>
Connection
ID
Reply
Data
0x1D
2 bytes
1 byte
<Projector busy reply>
Connection
ID
Reply
Status code
2 bytes
0x1F
1 byte
<Authentication error reply>
Authentication
Reply
Connection
ID
Error code
0x1F
0x04
0x00
1 byte
78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Utilize projector – Advanced -
Automatic Connection Break
The TCP connection will be automatically disconnected after there is no
communication for 30 seconds after being established.
Authentication
The projector does not accept commands without authentication success
when authentication is enabled. The projector uses a challenge response type
authentication with an MD5 (Message Digest 5) algorithm.
When the projector is using a LAN, a random eight bytes will be returned if
authentication is enabled. Bind this received 8 bytes and the authentication
password and digest this data with the MD5 algorithm and add this in front of the
commands to send.
Following is a sample if the authentication password is set to “password” and the
random eight bytes are “a572f60c”.
1) Select the projector.
2) Receive the random eight bytes “a572f60c” from the projector.
3) Bind the random eight bytes “a572f60c” and the authentication password
“password” and it becomes “a572f60cpassword”.
4) Digest this bind “a572f60cpassword” with MD5 algorithm.
It will be “e3d97429adffa11bce1f7275813d4bde”.
5) Add this “e3d97429adffa11bce1f7275813d4bde” in front of the commands and
send the data.
Send “e3d97429adffa11bce1f7275813d4bde”+command.
6) When the sending data is correct, the command will be performed and the
reply data will be returned. Otherwise, an authentication error will be returned.
ꢅꢆ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Troubleshooting
5. Troubleshooting
Reference
Page
Problem
Likely Cause
Things to Check
Number
The projector is not turned
on.
Is the projector's lamp on?
*17
*18
No image
The projector's input source Is the projector switched to
isn't switched to MIU.
MIU?
Check both the PC
and projector's network
settings. If you change the
projector's settings, turn off
the projector's AC power
and then turn it on again.
If you simply put the
projector in STANDBY
power mode and then
turn it on again, the new
settings might not take
effect.
The PC and/or projector's
network settings are not
configured correctly.
The projector
that you want
to connect to
is nowhere
to be found
on the list
8, 10, 16
of available
projectors
• Bring the PC and
projector closer together
• Radio waves won't go
through concrete and
metal (steel doors, etc.)
Weak radio signal
–
Check the mode on MIU
Menu to make sure that it is
in the correct mode.
Can't
The Projector isn't in Live
50
48
communicate Mode
The projector isn't capable Try increasing the Capture
of relaying dynamic images Performance priority level.
such as PowerPoint®
animation at full speed.
It may improve the speed a
little.
The projected
image is
rather slow
compared to
that of the PC
Try setting the image
compression to "Low."
being used for transferring The resolution will drop
The compression rate
48
the images is too low.
in quality, but it may help
improve the speed.
(continued on next page)
80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Troubleshooting
Reference
Problem
Likely Cause
Things to Check
Page
Number
Try setting the image
compression to "High."
• You may experience a
drop in speed.
Lots of
The compression rate
interference in being used for transferring
the images
49
the images is too high.
Cursor of the PC and
cursor of the projector
are displayed coming in
succession.
Turn off the cursor
Emulation of MIU MIU Live
Viewer option.
Two cursors
appear
48
48
Some PCs do not display
the cursor in MIU MIU Live Emulation of MIU MIU Live
Viewer.
Turn off the cursor
No cursor
appears
Viewer option.
No information is
shown after mass
storage device is
set on Thumbnail or set.
Directory mode.
Select either Thumbnail
mode or Directory mode
again, showing PC LESS
Presentation Menu.
The mode setting is not
renewed after the device is
53, 63
*12
The wireless LAN card isn't
Insert the wireless LAN
card that came with your
projector into the module.
inserted into the projector
or the memory card is still
inserted.
Can't communicate
Can't communicate
There is closely another
projector or other that has
the same wireless setting.
24
*54
Try changing of SSID and
IP Address.
The PC and/or projector's
network settings are not
configured correctly.
Check both the PC
and projector's network
settings.
11-13
*12
Remove the wireless LAN
SD card from the projector
(you can't use both wireless
and wired LAN connections
at the same time).
The wireless LAN card is
inserted into the projector.
Others
Communication between
the projector and PC is not
working well.
- Information from the
projector to PC is not
correct or completed
Try "MIU RESTART"
in MIU SERVICE MENU.
*58
- The projector does not
respond
MIU Functions of the
projector is not working
well.
- Image on screen is
freezed
* User's Manual - Operating Guide
81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. Specifications
6. Specifications
Item
Product name
Specifications
Liquid crystal projector
File format
JPEG, PNG, BMP and MPEG4
Dedicated PC application and Web browser
TCP/IP, DHCP client and HTTP server
μITORN4.0 compliance
Control software
Corresponding protocol
Firmware OS
Wireless LAN (IEEE802.11g)
Network
(Ad-Hoc and Infrastructure modes)
Ethernet (100Base-TX/10Base-T)
Security
WEP(64/128bit), WPA-PSK/PSK2(TKIP/AES), SSID
OS: Windows® XP Home Edition/ Professional
Windows® 2000 Professional
CPU: Pentium III 600MHz or more is suggested.
Memory size: 64M bytes or mode,
PC application
128M bytes or more in case of XP
operational environment Graphic I/F: DirectX 6.1 or later
Video RAM: 4MB required (8MB recommended)
HDD: 10MB
CD-ROM drive
Web browser: Internet Explorer 5.5 or later
SD card
SD card (Corresponding card is not confirmed yet.)
C-guys SD-Link11g
Wireless LAN card
USB1.1 host mass storage class SBC/BOT type
Following USB memories can be read/written.
- USB memory type
USB
- Card reader type
(Corresponding card is not confirmed yet.)
82
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Warranty and After-sales service
7. Warranty and After-sales service
If a problem occurs with the equipment, first refer to the “5. Troubleshooting” ( 80)
section and run through the suggested checks. If this does not resolve the problem,
contact your dealer or service company. They will tell you what warranty condition is
applied.
83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Audio Visual Products
2900 Dukane Drive
St. Charles, Illinois 60174
www.dukcorp.com/av
Toll-free: 800-676-2487
Fax: 630-584-5156
e-mail: [email protected]
#401-8944-00
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|